You are on page 1of 422

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management

Operator Manual

312401/B March 2009

Document history
Document number: 312401 Rev. A Rev. B June 2007 March 2009 First edition in Teamcenter. Replaces AD-00534. No changes to contents. Major revision. Refer to P&I BKJ01-2007/1530.

This Operator Manual describes how to use the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management controls and display facilities. It is intended for system operators. He/she should be experienced in the operation of alarm and monitoring systems and have basic knowledge of personal computers or should have attended a Kongsberg Maritime training course.

The reader

Note
The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information contained within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of Kongsberg Maritime AS. Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.

Warning
The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury to personnel. The user must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before attempting to operate or work on the equipment. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.

Comments

To assist us in making improvements to the product and to this manual, we welcome comments and constructive criticism. e-mail: km.documentation@kongsberg.com

Kongsberg Maritime AS
Bekkajordet P.O.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten, Norway
Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.kongsberg.com

Operator Manual

Table of contents
Admonitions ........................................................................................................... 11 Glossary..................................................................................................................12 Alarm list terms ......................................................................................................14 1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 INTRODUCTION .............................................................. 15 Purpose ...................................................................................................................15 Safety rules .............................................................................................................17 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.................................................... 18 System overview ....................................................................................................18 K-Chief 500 system diagrams ................................................................................20 Design principles ....................................................................................................22
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 System components .................................................................................... 22 Decentralized system architecture ................................................................ 23 Centralized operation .................................................................................. 25 Alarms ....................................................................................................... 27 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring.................................................. 30 Trend monitoring ........................................................................................ 30 Fuel performance system (optional) ............................................................. 30 Running hours and counters......................................................................... 31 Tank display ............................................................................................... 32 Engine monitoring ...................................................................................... 34 About the Bridge Watch Monitoring System................................................. 40 About bridge watch alarms .......................................................................... 40 Stand-by pumps.......................................................................................... 41 Valve control ............................................................................................. 42 PID controllers .......................................................................................... 43 Compressor control .................................................................................... 43 Purifier control ........................................................................................... 43 Boiler control ............................................................................................ 44 Introduction................................................................................................ 45 Generator control functions ........................................................................ 46 Power management functions with shaft generator ....................................... 47

2.4 2.5

Alarm system..........................................................................................................27
2.4.1 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6

System functions, Alarm and Monitoring System .................................................30

2.6

System functions, Bridge Watch Monitoring System ............................................40
2.6.1 2.6.2

2.7

System functions, Process Control System ............................................................41
2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6

2.8

System functions, Power Management System .....................................................45
2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3

3 3.1

UNIT DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................... 50 Overview ................................................................................................................50

312401/B

3

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

3.2

Operator Stations and Operator Panels ..................................................................51
3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.6 Operator Station (OS) ................................................................................. 51 Midi Operator Station (MOS) ...................................................................... 52 Control Room Panel (CRP) ......................................................................... 53 Input Panel (INP)........................................................................................ 54 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC)..................................................................... 55 Touch Control Panel (TCP) ......................................................................... 56 Purpose ...................................................................................................... 58 Watch Calling repeat alarm feature............................................................... 58 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) .......................................................................... 59 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) ........................................................................... 60 Main characteristics .................................................................................... 63 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) ................................................................ 64 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc).............................................................. 64 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32, RDi-32a)...................................................... 65 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8)............................................................... 66 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) ................................................................. 66 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) ................................................................... 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) ................................................................... 68 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) .................................................................... 69 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) ................................................ 70 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) ...................................................................... 71 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) ................................................... 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS).............................................................. 72 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) ............................................................ 73 Gateway types ............................................................................................ 74 The System Gateway (SGW) ....................................................................... 74 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) .................................................... 75

3.3

Watch Calling System ............................................................................................58
3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4

3.4

Distributed Processing Units ..................................................................................63
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 3.4.10 3.4.11 3.4.12 3.4.13 3.4.14

3.5

Gateways ................................................................................................................74
3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3

4 4.1

USER INTERFACE ............................................................ 77 Overview ................................................................................................................77
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 Operator functions ...................................................................................... 77 Alarm and monitoring display ..................................................................... 77 Process mimics, bar graphs and status displays ............................................. 77 Logging and hard copy ............................................................................... 78 Self-checking and diagnostics...................................................................... 78 Access control ........................................................................................... 78 Display layout ............................................................................................ 79 Image types in the main window.................................................................. 79

4.2

System images ........................................................................................................79
4.2.1 4.2.2

4

312401/B

Operator Manual

4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10

Process image............................................................................................. 80 List image .................................................................................................. 80 Trend image ............................................................................................... 82 Monitoring image ....................................................................................... 83 System configuration image......................................................................... 84 PDF viewer ............................................................................................... 85 Navigator ................................................................................................... 86 How processes are displayed and controlled ................................................. 87

4.3 5 5.1 5.2

ShipViewer .............................................................................................................89 GETTING STARTED.......................................................... 90 Operator stations and panels...................................................................................90 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) ...................................................................91
5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 Understanding the CRP ............................................................................... 91 ALARM group buttons and lamp ................................................................. 91 PANEL group lamps ................................................................................... 92 COMMAND group buttons and lamps ......................................................... 92 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) ............................................................... 93 Trackball ................................................................................................... 94 Buzzer ....................................................................................................... 94 Temperature sensor ..................................................................................... 94 Understanding the TCP ............................................................................... 95 Alarm Navigator......................................................................................... 95 Graphic Display Navigator .......................................................................... 96 Understanding the ALC............................................................................... 97 ALARM group buttons and lamps ............................................................... 97 PANEL group lamps ................................................................................... 98 COMMAND group buttons and lamps ......................................................... 98 Background light ........................................................................................ 98 Buzzer ....................................................................................................... 98 Temperature sensor ..................................................................................... 99 Understanding the INP .............................................................................. 100 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) ............................................................. 100 Trackball ................................................................................................. 101 Background light ...................................................................................... 102 Temperature sensor ................................................................................... 102 Range of use ............................................................................................ 103 Understanding the keyboard ...................................................................... 103 Understanding the display ......................................................................... 105

5.3

Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP)....................................................................95
5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3

5.4

Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) ..............................................................97
5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7

5.5

Using the Input Panel (INP) .................................................................................100
5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5

5.6

Using the Midi Operator Station ..........................................................................103
5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3

312401/B

5

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

5.6.4

Menus...................................................................................................... 106 Explanation of controls and indicators........................................................ 107 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels ......................................... 109 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels...........................................110 How to test the panel..................................................................................110 Explanation of controls and indicators.........................................................110 How to respond to alarms ...........................................................................112 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels ..........................................113 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels...........................................113 How to test the panel..................................................................................113

5.7

Using the Watch Bridge Unit ...............................................................................107
5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4

5.8

Using the Watch Cabin Unit................................................................................. 110
5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4 5.8.5

6 6.1 6.2

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM......................................................................... 114 Overview .............................................................................................................. 114 OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP)....................... 115
6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.2.8 6.2.9 6.2.10 6.2.11 6.2.12 6.2.13 6.2.14 6.2.15 6.2.16 6.2.17 6.2.18 6.2.19 6.2.20 6.2.21 6.2.22 6.2.23 6.2.24 6.2.25 6.2.26 6.2.27 How to handle alarm events........................................................................115 Navigator name definitions ........................................................................115 How alarms are printed after a black-out .....................................................116 How to acknowledge alarms .......................................................................116 How to display Alarm Summary .................................................................117 How to display alarm history ......................................................................119 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 120 How to display counters and reset counters................................................. 121 How to display offscan alarms ................................................................... 121 How to toggle between group and alarm display ......................................... 122 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions ....................................... 122 Screen Saver............................................................................................. 124 How to save screen dump .......................................................................... 125 How to customise the Favourites ............................................................... 126 How to print Miscellaneous Logs............................................................... 127 How to configure the Event Log ................................................................ 132 How to configure your own Selected Points group ...................................... 133 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group .......................... 134 How to configure the Autolog.................................................................... 135 How to configure the Noonlog ................................................................... 136 Where to find the Event Log display .......................................................... 137 How to display system information ............................................................ 137 Access control system ............................................................................... 138 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information ............................. 145 How to change time zone .......................................................................... 145 How to change system time ....................................................................... 146 Info field .................................................................................................. 147

6

312401/B

Operator Manual

6.2.28 6.2.29 6.2.30 6.2.31 6.2.32 6.2.33 6.2.34 6.2.35 6.2.36 6.2.37 6.2.38 6.2.39 6.2.40 6.2.41

How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms .................................... 147 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves ............................. 147 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer........................................... 148 How to change tag parameters for a channel ............................................... 148 How to change Deviation parameters ......................................................... 152 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration .......................................... 155 How to set the On Duty engineer ............................................................... 155 How to select the Watch Responsible location ............................................ 156 How to call officers................................................................................... 157 How to change the engineer qualifications .................................................. 159 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode............................................... 159 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel .................................. 160 How to make your own short trend display ................................................ 162 How to make your own long trend display ................................................. 176 How to lock and unlock the Touch Control Panel ........................................ 180 How to display Alarm Summary ................................................................ 182 How to display alarm history ..................................................................... 183 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 184 How to display counters and reset counters................................................. 184 How to display offscan alarms ................................................................... 185 How to toggle between group and alarm display ......................................... 186 How to set day, dusk or night viewing conditions ....................................... 186 Screen saver ............................................................................................. 188 How to save screen dump .......................................................................... 189 How to customise the Favourites ............................................................... 190 How to print Miscellaneous Logs............................................................... 190 How to configure the Event Log ................................................................ 195 How to configure your own Selected Points group ...................................... 196 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group .......................... 197 How to configure the Autolog.................................................................... 199 How to configure the Noonlog ................................................................... 199 Where to find the Event Log display .......................................................... 200 How to display system information ............................................................ 200 Access control system ............................................................................... 201 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information ............................. 207 How to change time zone .......................................................................... 208 How to change system time ....................................................................... 209 Info field .................................................................................................. 210 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms .................................... 210 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves ............................. 210 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer............................................211 How to change tag parameters for a channel ................................................211

6.3

OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP).......................180
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3.7 6.3.8 6.3.9 6.3.10 6.3.11 6.3.12 6.3.13 6.3.14 6.3.15 6.3.16 6.3.17 6.3.18 6.3.19 6.3.20 6.3.21 6.3.22 6.3.23 6.3.24 6.3.25 6.3.26 6.3.27 6.3.28

312401/B

7

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

6.3.29 6.3.30 6.3.31 6.3.32 6.3.33 6.3.34 6.3.35 6.3.36 6.3.37 6.3.38

How to change Deviation parameters ......................................................... 215 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration .......................................... 218 How to set the On Duty engineer ............................................................... 218 How to select the Watch Responsible location ............................................ 218 How to call officers................................................................................... 219 How to change the engineer qualifications .................................................. 221 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode............................................... 221 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel .................................. 222 How to make your own short trend display ................................................ 224 How to make your own long trend display ................................................. 238 How to handle alarm events....................................................................... 242 How to display alarm history ..................................................................... 242 How to display alarm summary.................................................................. 243 How to display alarm group information .................................................... 243 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration ....................................... 244 About password access.............................................................................. 245 How to display information about DPUs, tags and tag details ...................... 246 How to change tag parameters .................................................................. 247 How to change alarm limits ....................................................................... 251 How to change alarm delay ....................................................................... 251 How to receive a call................................................................................. 252 How to respond to alarms .......................................................................... 252 How to call the ON DUTY engineer .......................................................... 252 How to transfer watch responsibility .......................................................... 252 How to accept watch responsibility ............................................................ 253 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WBU) ........... 253 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WCU) ........... 253 Main ShipViewer functions ...................................................................... 255 Understanding the ShipViewer display ....................................................... 255 Explanation of ShipViewer displays ........................................................... 257 How to print displayed information............................................................ 260 How to save ShipViewer images ................................................................ 261 How to view saved mimic diagram files ..................................................... 261 ME monitoring overview mimic ................................................................ 263 Bearing Wear............................................................................................ 263 Cylinder Liner – Fluctuating monitoring (scuffing) .................................... 271

6.4

MOS operational procedures................................................................................242
6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 6.4.8 6.4.9 6.4.10

6.5

Watch Calling system operational procedures .....................................................252
6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 6.5.6 6.5.7

6.6

ShipViewer operational procedures......................................................................255
6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 6.6.5 6.6.6

6.7

ME monitoring operational procedures................................................................263
6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3

7 7.1

OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES, BRIDGE WATCH MONITORING SYSTEM .................................................. 276 Overview ..............................................................................................................276

8

312401/B

.....................1 8.................2 9......................... 348 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP)...... 295 How to operate a compressor......................................................................................................................................... 283 How to operate a fan starter .......4.... 349 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control ................. 359 How to operate the main switchboard controller .... 344 8..........347 About the Power Management System ................1 8....................................3 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES............2 7...........................4 8......... 309 How to operate a PID controller..............2.... 349 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control ......................................2.......................8 Overview ............2......3............................................................3...........348 9.................................................. 313 How to open Tag overview ...........5 How to operate a pump starter ............1 9......................6 9 9....3 8........................................................6 7.... 317 How to operate a fan starter .............Operator Manual 7................................................................................................ 279 How to change between day and night viewing............... 276 How to turn the system on/off .............347 OS operational procedures ....................................................................................2 8...2........................................................................................ 279 How to adjust system timers .................................7 9........................................................ 317 How to operate a pump starter ..................................................................................................................3................................................ 277 How to select backup navigator on duty .3 9.....2..................... 340 How to operate a PID controller..............6 9........................................................................................................ 283 Overview ............................3............................. 327 How to operate a compressor................4 8........................... 349 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the TCP).........1 8.............3........ 281 8 8........................2 8..................3...........3...... 357 How to operate a generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint ...4............................... POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM...............3 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES................2............................................................... 363 312401/B 9 ................................................4 MOS operational procedures........................... 360 How to operate a bus-tie breaker .........................................................................283 About the Process Control System ......................2............4.................................................................1 9............. 347 Overview ................3 8..............3...4...4 7.......................... 280 How to change access level ......5 9.....2.....................................................................................................................2......................4..283 8..3.......................8 7..........................283 OS operational procedures ............................3.......................... 278 How to call for backup .5 8.......................................................................3....................................3..................9 Normal use of the BWMS ..................2 9.......................................3 7... 330 How to operate a valve.................................316 8....................................................................4 9.......................2 BWMS operational procedures ..................276 7.4............ PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM....................1 7................. 280 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration .5 7..............2 8......................................... 299 How to operate valves ...................................3......7 7.. 278 How to turn system’s auto mode on/off ....................

.......................................................................4 9..................................3................................................. 367 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control .. 410 RIO-C3 7–segment display.......................3 10.......................5 9....403 11 MAINTENANCE ........................3 11...............2 11..........................................411 How to handle DPU communication errors........3............................................7 10........................................... 407 Yearly maintenance.................3 Corrective maintenance .......................... 393 Digital input tag items .....4...........4............... 381 How to operate a bus-tie breaker ...............2......... 401 Alarm sub-menu items ..................4.............386 Alarm and monitoring parameters................3 How to handle DPU error codes.......................................... 402 Purpose ........409 11.............405 11.................. 408 11........ but with adjustable load setpoint ..................... 370 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control .......................................................... 396 Exhaust mean value tag items ...................................2 Preventive maintenance......................................2 10............6 10 10........................................................3 9..............366 9...............................................................................................................................2....410 11..............4 Engineer’s safety ............................................3...........4.......1 10................................3.................................1 11...................................................................................................2................................... 405 11.5 Analogue input tag items...............................................................................2 10..6 10.........................................1 11.. 403 Functions ...............3 REFERENCE GUIDE.4 Maintenance schedule ................................................................ 385 Overview ................ 403 Local control ...2.4......................Kongsberg K-Chief 500 9......... 379 How to operate a generator set without start/stop...................................................... 403 10.....406 11...............4 10...........................................2 9...................... 403 Operator Station control ......4. 406 6–monthly maintenance ......................2 11........................................................................4 MOS operational procedures..................................................................... 406 Weekly maintenance ....1 9...................5 10........4...............................................................4..........4..............................3...........................................................................4 Built In Self-Test (BIST) .........................1 10.........................389 10.......................................3.................. 382 9.........................................................4 10.....4............................. 400 Common sub-menu items .4.................. 403 Parameters .................................................................................. 397 Exhaust deviation tag items ......................9 How to operate the one-touch auto sequence ...............................3 10.......................4.... 389 Counter input tag items .....................1 10...................................1 Introduction ...............................................4...............................385 Tag types... 364 User interface ...3.............................................................................................................3.............................................................................................................. 366 How to operate the main switchboard controller ...................................2 10................4............. 412 10 312401/B ..............................................................................

Caution Text set off in this manner provides a warning notice that failure to follow the directions in this CAUTION can result in damage to equipment. Note Text set off in this manner presents clarifying information or specific instructions pertinent to the immediate instruction. WARNING Text set off in this manner provides a warning notice that failure to follow the directions in this WARNING can result in bodily harm or loss of life and/or extensive damage to equipment. 312401/B 11 .Operator Manual Admonitions The following admonitions found throughout this manual mark special messages to alert the user of specific information concerning of the personnel. the equipment or the process.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Glossary ACK ALC AMS BIST BWMS CAN CCR CRP DG dPSC DPU ER ECR EMC EMD EMI ESD GND GUI IACS ID IEC IMO INP I/O KM LAN LCD LED MCT MOS NC NO OD OS Acknowledge Alarm & Control Panel Alarm and Monitoring System Built In System Test Bridge Watch Monitoring System Controller Area Network Cargo Control Room Control Room Panel Diesel Generator Dual Process Segment Controller Distributed Processing Unit Engine Room Engine Control Room Electromagnetic Compatibility European union Maritime Directorate Electromagnetic Immunity Electrostatic Discharge Ground (module 0 V reference) Graphic User Interface International Association of Class Societies Inner Diameter International Electrotechnical Commission International Maritime Organisation Input Panel Input/Output Kongsberg Maritime Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Multi-cable Transit System Midi Operator Station Normally Closed Normally Open Outer Diameter Operator Station 12 312401/B .

Operator Manual PCS PDO PDS PE PEC PLC PMS PS PSO PSS RAi RAi TC RAo RDi RDo RIO SG STP TCP UMS UPS USB UTC UTP VCC WBU WCU Process Control System Process Data Object Process Data Segment Protective Earth Parallel Earthing Conductor Programmable Logic Controller Power Management System Process Station Power Switch Over Module Process Segment Starcoupler Module Remote Analogue Input Device Remote Analogue Input Device for Thermo Couple Remote Analogue Output Device Remote Digital Input Device Remote Digital Output Device Remote I/O Shaft Generator Shielded Twisted Pair Touch Control Panel Unmanned Machinery Space Uninterruptible Power Supply Universal Serial Bus Universal Time Coordinated Unshielded Twisted Pair Voltage Converter Controller Watch Bridge Unit Watch Cabin Unit 312401/B 13 .

Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving less than 4 mA. Used for example when a 4 to 20 mA current loop is giving more than 20 mA. The switch is closed. When the input signal is lower than a set limit. such as when the main engine is stopped. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations. When the input signal is higher than a set limit. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms. When the input signal is lower than a set limit. Inhibit. When the input signal is higher than a set limit.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm list terms Analogue sensors Grad High Hi-Hi IFH IFL Inhib Low Lo-Lo Offsc Digital sensors Broken Closed Inhib Offsc Open Short The wiring to the sensor has an open-circuit. The input signal is changing rapidly. High alarm. High-High alarm. Instrument failure low alarm. Offscan alarm. The switch is open. The input signal has been inhibited to avoid unnecessary alarms. Inhibit. such as “valve open”. Indicates that the input signal is not checked for alarm situations and is not measured any more. Offscan alarm. The wiring to the sensor has a short-circuit. such as when the main engine is stopped. 14 312401/B . such as “valve closed”. Gradient alarm. Instrument failure high alarm. Low-Low alarm. Low alarm.

• Operational procedures.Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION 1. • Getting started – This chapter explains how to use the basic control functions of the K-Chief 500 system. 312401/B 15 . • Operational procedures.1 Purpose The purpose of this Operator Manual is to present the information required to operate the Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. Power Management System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Power Management System for all Operator Station types. The manual includes the following main chapters: • System description – This chapter presents a general introduction to the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. • User interface – This chapter presents all the elements of the user interface. • Reference guide – This chapter contains parameter-related information accessible from the various operator locations. • Unit descriptions – This chapter presents a technical description of the K-Chief 500 system units. Process Control System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Process Control System for all Operator Station types. The purpose of this Operator Manual is to present the information required to operate the Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. Bridge Watch Monitoring System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Bridge Watch Monitoring System. • Operational procedures. • Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System – This chapter contains step-by-step procedures for operation of the Alarm and Monitoring System for all Operator Station types.

For a specific project configuration. Important Windows NT.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Maintenance – This chapter explains how to keep the system in good working order and what to do if the system fails. Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. Windows XP and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Note The K-Chief 500 is a modular system. consisting of standard main units as Operator Stations. the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class. Windows 2000. 16 312401/B .

312401/B 17 . printed circuit boards and similar. WARNING Fire If a fire condition arises. Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices Certain semiconductive devices used in this equipment are liable to damage due to static voltages. Kongsberg Maritime disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper installation. depending on individual allergies. emission of toxic fumes can be anticipated from burning insulation. The dust is a temporary health hazard. WARNING Health hazards Do not inhale dust when cleaning the interior of the system. use or maintenance of the equipment.Introduction 1.2 Safety rules Note Kongsberg Maritime’s health and safety system must be adhered to at all times. Observe all precautions for handling of semiconductive sensitive devices.

1 System overview The K-Chief 500 is an Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. bulk carriers. including oil and gas tankers. covering the whole range from low complexity alarm systems to highly integrated alarm and monitoring systems with advanced process control. passenger vessels.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2. The system is based on Kongsberg Maritime’s unified automation concept. Modular design allows flexibility in configuring the system to individual requirements. The K-Chief 500 is configurable for all ship types. The main purpose of the system is to give ship’s officers all the basic alarms and status information they require in order to maintain safe and efficient operation of the machinery and other relevant equipment. reefers and other special purpose vessels. Note This manual describes the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System with Process Control and Power Management. 18 312401/B . where each individual ship configuration is built up using standard modules communicating on CAN and LAN networks. container and Ro-Ro vessels. Sub-systems can include all or any combination of the following: • Alarm and monitoring system • Auxiliary control system • Power management system • Cargo control system • Propulsion control • Ballast automation system • HVAC (air conditioning) • Anti-heeling • Reefer monitoring • Fire system • Main Engine monitoring system Note This manual only describes the K-Chief 500 used as an Alarm and Monitoring System.

Refer to Typical small K-Chief 500 system (oil tanker) on page 20 and Typical large K-Chief 500 system (gas tanker) on page 21 for a principal overview of the K-Chief 500 system. The K-Chief 500 system can be a stand-alone system. The system incorporates the latest advances in hardware and software technology. It is designed to meet the classification societies requirements for periodically unmanned engine room operation. • K-Gauge – The K-Gauge is a cargo monitoring and control system which is a highly integrated system incorporating level gauging. K-Log supports event based recording of data related to navigation. The Main Engine monitoring is under constant development to meet the modern requirements of such a system. K-Chief 500 is also developed to strict military quality standards. main bearing temperature. • Voyage data recorder – The main purpose of our Voyage Data Recorder (VDR) the Maritime Black Box MBB® is to record and store relevant ship’s data and allow reconstruction of ship incidents at sea. and eleven classification societies. local maritime authorities. valve and pump control. Torque measurements. 312401/B 19 . Bearing Wear alarm handling. but it may also be interfaced with other systems. port calls and other operational activities. Water In Oil Detection. • FleetMaster – The FleetMaster enables continuous access to primary vessel data both on board the vessel and from ashore. • Main Engine monitoring system – The ME monitoring system monitoring the conditions of Main Engine. Examples of systems are shown in the list underneath. and all modules are type approved. engine watch. IACS. • K-log – The K-Log Electronic Logbooks are designed to replace the traditional paper logbooks.System description K-Chief 500 complies with the requirements of IMO. x-head bearing and crank bearing temperature. Cylinder Liner temperature and detections of scuffing of piston wall. • External VDR • Serial interface to external systems — for instance a fire system or a level gauging system. temperature and pressure monitoring. The system conforms to all rules and regulations. • Auto Chief C20 – The Auto Chief C20 is a propulsion control system which can be adapted to various engines.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2.2 K-Chief 500 system diagrams Figure 1 Typical small K-Chief 500 system (oil tanker) Wheelhouse Engine Control Room Accommodation WCU WCU WCU WCU WCU WCU WCU WBU Printer OS CRP 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o OS OS Dual LAN Switch MSI12 Instrument driver DPU Dual CAN CEG CEG Serial line RS-422 dPSC Serial gateway for propulsion control system DPU Rotating light and horn MOS MOS MOS dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU (vs060222f) DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU 8 DPU Cabinet 16 DPU Cabinet 16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC PMS modules to be installed in MSB / ESB Process Area 20 312401/B .

System description Figure 2 Typical large K-Chief 500 system (gas tanker) Wheelhouse Engine Control Room Cargo Control Room Accommodation WCU WCU WCU WCU WCU WCU WCU WBU Printer OS CRP 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o Printer OS OS CRP 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o 1 h9 p2 5 A u 1 2 t o OS OS OS Dual LAN Switch MSI12 MSI12 Switch Instrument driver DPU Dual CAN Serial line RS-422 CEG CEG Serial line RS-422 CEG CEG Dual CAN dPSC Serial gateway for propulsion control system DPU Rotating light and horn Rotating light and horn Routing of tags between Engine Room and Cargo segments MOS MOS MOS MOS MOS dPSC DPU dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU dPSC DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU DPU 8 DPU Cabinet 16 DPU Cabinet 16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC PMS modules to be installed in MSB / ESB (vs060222i) 16 DPU Cabinet 16 DPU Cabinet with dPSC Engine Room Process Area Cargo Process Area 312401/B 21 .

allow control of the Watch Calling System and print various logs.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2. • Watch Bridge Units (WBU) – Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms on the bridge while in bridge control and to accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility to and from the bridge. • Operator Panels (CRP/INP/ALC/TCP) – Their main functions are to act as status and command panels for the Operator Stations. remote operation of equipment adjustment of parameters etc. For small alarm systems it can be the only Operator Station. They also enable the operator access to Distributed Processing Units for inspection of variables. • Distributed Processing Units (DPU) – Their main functions are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. They also include a keypad for entering number values into the system and/or a trackball for controlling cursor position on the Operator Station screen. A number of different Distributed Processing Units are available to meet specific control and monitoring applications. The main building blocks of the K-Chief 500 are: • Operator Stations (OS) – Their main functions are to receive alarms and to allow monitoring and control of the system.3 Design principles 2.3. The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose Operator Station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship. 22 312401/B . • Watch Cabin Units (WCU) – Their main functions are to indicate engine room alarms in the engineer on duty’s cabin and in the public quarters while in bridge control. even out on deck. • Midi Operator Stations (MOS) – Their main functions are to allows alarm indication.1 System components The K-Chief 500 is a modular system that allows us to meet individual ship owner’s requirements using standard modules. They can display mimic diagrams. process control and power management.

• System Gateway (SGW) – The SGW connects two CAN lines to two Local Area Network lines. the appropriate software and parameters are down-loaded to the unit. K-Chief 500 is a fully microprocessor-based system. • Dual redundant Controller Area Network (CAN) – The CAN is used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units. Different selections of these units are used to configure each individual system. All monitoring and automation functions are carried out by the Distributed Processing Units. It is decentralised for safety and ease of installation. The number of channels varies from 8 to 32. The main purpose is to receive messages from the two process buses running CAN. This allows some Distributed Processing Units to perform 312401/B 23 . 2. • Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) – The dPSC is a dual two channel CAN gateway. The main function of the dPSC is to process messages from the a local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global process bus.System description • Dual redundant Local Area Network (LAN) – The LAN is used for communication between the Operator Stations and other PC based equipment. Each Distributed Processing Unit type has a specific capacity in number and type of analogue or digital input and output channels. but operation is centralised using Operator Stations (OS). These communicate with each other on a redundant high capacity process-bus. where they are available for other dPSCs and System Gateways. In most cases the two channels are working in parallel on redundant CAN lines. while the centralised Operator Stations provide the Man Machine Interface. Each unit is connected to two completely separate CAN-buses for maximum redundancy.2 Decentralized system architecture The heart of the K-Chief 500 system is the small family of different intelligent I/O units called Distributed Processing Units. Each unit is connected to two completely separate Local Area Networks for maximum redundancy. To configure the tasks for a specific Distributed Processing Unit. • Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) – The PSS is used to segment the CAN-bus so that a short circuit or broken line in one segment will not affect the functions in the other segments.3. and update the main Operator Station database.

The Distributed Processing Units are CE marked as required for some European Union flagstate vessels. The process-bus used for communication between the Distributed Processing Units in the K-Chief 500 system is the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. Failures to the process-bus. satisfying the requirements for placement in the most demanding locations. satisfying all the new Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements. The Built In System Test (BIST) will detect the error and warn the operator. some control functions. The latter installation method is required by SOLAS Regulation 45 for some vessels types. Exchange of a faulty Distributed Processing Unit can be done without turning the power off the K-Chief 500. They also meet the requirements to use the “Wheel Mark” defined by the European Union Maritime Directive (EMD). The K-Chief 500 is designed to accept both a “grounded” or a “floating” earth installation. System Gateways (SGW) may be added to the CAN network. 24 312401/B . For systems with a high number of Distributed Processing Units or for other design reasons. These units provide the necessary segregation of the automation system between for instance the different sections of an alarm and monitoring system. If a unit fails. The operator then requests the system to replace the module. Only Ingress Protection (IP) may be needed. software is automatically down-loaded and the Distributed Processing Unit starts operating. communication and input/output channels. cabling or connected sensors will also be detected by the Built In System Test. Each Distributed Processing Unit has an internal three-way galvanic isolation between power. This makes it easy to separate automation system functions. The System Gateways do not lower system performance or limit the possibilities for locating operator stations. some safety functions or any combination of these. The procedure is simply to disconnect and remove the faulty unit. this will not affect the power source. The Distributed Processing Units have been designed for immunity against single failures. Floating earth allows coexistence with other systems and ground leakage detection. The CAN-bus has a very high reliability. communication bus or damage the sensors.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 alarm functions. All Distributed Processing Units can be mounted directly on diesel engines or similar locations without shock absorbers. All Distributed Processing Unit types have been qualified according to the latest revision of the IACS E10 test procedure. and then mount and reconnect a replacement.

All Operator Stations are Windows based personal computers. The Operator Stations are fitted with colour graphic displays and are operated through a purpose built Operator Panel. Control of any of the Distributed Processing Units can be performed from the Operator Stations. Full monitoring and alarm facilities are provided in both the machinery space and the Engine Control Room. while the machinery watch is carried out from the Bridge. and the Watch Calling system allows automatic calling of duty engineers. All general information such as monitoring of alarms. This means that data displayed at any Operator Station is always up-to-date. The control availability is defined by extensive use of software password access. These are normally located in the Engine Control Room. are normally used for monitoring only. Some Operator Stations. Although every Operator Station is identical. engineering data and software. are logged and time tagged (optional). the data traffic on the process bus and the Local Area Network is kept to a minimum. The Operator Stations are normally connected to the Distributed Processing Units trough a Dual Redundant Control Area Network. This allows both the machinery space and the Engine Control Room to be safely left unmanned.3 Centralized operation The K-Chief 500 system is operated through a number of Operator Stations. They work in parallel. Ship’s Office or other parts of the vessel. trends and graphics are available for inspection. giving extremely fast data access. none of them acts as master. These units will not allow acknowledgement of alarms or execution of control commands. such as units located in the Ship’s Office. As a result of this. Advanced facilities can also be provided for unmanned machinery space. Cargo Control Room. Changing a limit or parameter on one Operator Station will automatically update all other Operator Stations.3. Damage Control Room. type approved for maritime use. The Operator Station serves as the database host for process data. access to vital functions may be configured differently. such as the starting or stopping of a pump or the changing of an alarm limit.System description 2. The Operator Stations provides the operator with a number of standard display pictures containing information about the engine and surrounding equipment. Additional stations may be located in the Wheelhouse. All operator actions. Whenever a variable or state changes significantly the Distributed Processing Units update the database in each of the Operator Stations. Software for Operator Stations and the different Distributed Processing Units are stored 312401/B 25 . There is no need to request data each time the operator wishes to inspect a variable. All are interconnected via the dual redundant local area network.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 here. as required by the major classification societies. The local area network included as part of K-Chief 500 system can interface with personal computers for remote monitoring and even with other external computer systems. Version numbers and additional information can at any time be individually inspected for each K-Chief 500. The system logs all changes made. Our commissioning editor (SeaMate) is used to configure or modify the functionality of the K-Chief 500 and is used to generate “as-built documentation”. They include functions for automatic down-loading of parameters to the Distributed Processing Units at commissioning time or when a Distributed Processing Unit is replaced. Configuration control of the K-Chief 500 systems is taken care of by an automatic version update at any change of the engineering database or the application software. 26 312401/B .

System description 2. Alarm types Alarm detection for analogue signals The following functions are included: • Instrument failure alarms • Low-low process alarms with or without action (slow-down) • Low process alarms • High process alarms • High-high process alarms with or without action (slow-down) • Return to normal detection with dead-band to avoid alarm fluctuations • Adjustable filters to remove fluctuations in the incoming signals • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages Alarm detection for on/off (two state) signals The following functions are included: • High process alarms (open or closed) • Return to normal detection • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages Alarm detection for on/off signals with line check The following functions are included: • High process alarms (open or closed) • Line broken alarm • Line short alarm • Return to normal detection • Time delay of alarm triggering and return to normal messages 312401/B 27 . For more information on the Navigator please see Navigator on page 86 .4. The Navigator is an image which is shown when the HOME button on the Control Room Panel is pushed. Each alarm group is displayed on the left side of the Operator Station screen when the Navigator image is displayed.4 Alarm system 2.1 Alarms Alarm groups All alarms and monitored values are divided into alarm groups. The Navigator image makes it easy to navigate to the wanted information in the K-Chief 500 system.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Inhibit alarm Some alarms are conditional and will be inhibited when a specified condition is present. Alarm state indication The four last alarms detected by the system will be indicated in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. description and state will be displayed. inhibited: BLUE • Not updated or invalid values: ORANGE • Can be customised for extra critical alarms: MAGENTA 28 312401/B . acknowledged: YELLOW • Alarm state. This function is accomplished by defining a signal as an inhibit source for a specified alarm or a specified group of alarms. The following states are used by the system: • On/off signal open contact alarm: OPEN • On/off signal closed contact alarm: CLOSED • On/off signal broken alarm: BROKEN • On/off signal short alarm: SHORT • Analogue signal instrument failure. signal value outside high range: IFH (Instrument Failure High) • Analogue signal high alarm: HIGH • Analogue signal low alarm: LOW • Analogue signal high-high alarm: HI-HI • Analogue signal low-low alarm: LO-LO • On/off or analogue sensor taken out of scanning: OFFSC • On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: RETURN • On/off or analogue signal return from alarm: INHIBIT Alarm text colour Different colours have been used to visually distinguish between the alarm states. An adjustable time delay is available to extend the inhibit situation for each signal. The alarm tag. not acknowledged: RED with asterisk (*) • State changed from not acknowledged to normal: RED • Alarm state. The meaning of the different colours is listed below: • Normal state: GREEN • Alarm state. signal value outside low range: IFL (Instrument Failure Low) • Analogue signal instrument failure.

4.2 Sound off It is possible to make the alarm sound silent after it has notified an alarm. 312401/B 29 .4.1. The alarm pages comprise: • Alarm group display page • Alarm summary page. The alarm text in the Alarm window (down to the right on the display) is not changed by pushing the button. 2. containing a consecutive list of time-stamped alarms The monitoring pages include: • Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group • Selected points display (and logging facility) • Tag details. Alarm acknowledgement for separate or group alarms displayed on the screen is done through a single push.System description Alarm and monitoring displays There are several display pages for presenting alarms and monitored values. containing a list of all active alarms • Alarm history page.1 Alarm acknowledge It is possible to acknowledge alarms while a mimic window. alarm group or alarm summary is displayed.1. This is done by a single push on the sound off button. giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system 2. and changes the colour on the alarm text in the list views. It removes the alarm text in the Alarm window (down to the right on the display).

This system can display recorded and present data for all variables as curves. The trend monitoring system is a part of the Operator Station and consists of two trend displays: Short trend and Long trend. To study performance parameters momentary values are available. Individual calculations for each cylinder bank are made when relevant. This correction is done when running the engine at full load. Alarm limits are continuously calculated based on the engine load. the deviation alarm is blocked.3 Fuel performance system (optional) The fuel economising system is a tool to monitor fuel consumption and assess the efficiency of the propulsion machinery. As the average temperature is used as reference for the deviations. Accumulated fuel consumption and propeller shaft power such as for a voyage can be displayed and printed for reporting. Calculations are based on the Distributed Processing Units making continuous measurements. 2. An alarm is given if the deviation exceeds the acceptable limit.5.2 Trend monitoring The K-Chief 500 automatically records selected measurements. The dead-band is set narrower as the engine load increases.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2. and stores them for use in the trend monitoring system. Individual variations due to different exhaust piping and sensor locations for each cylinder are taken into account. Please see How to make your own short trend display on page 162 and How to make your own long trend display on page 176 for more details. it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference.1 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring The K-Chief 500 exhaust gas monitoring system calculates the deviation between the individual cylinders and the average value of all cylinders.5 System functions. The maximum number of cylinders for each engine or cylinder bank is 16.5.5. When the average temperature is below a preset value. 2. Alarm and Monitoring System 2. The following sensor data are required: • Fuel oil flow for each propulsion engine • Both input and output flow must be measured • Fuel oil temperature for all input and output flows 30 312401/B .

Values can be manually reset when units have been overhauled. Underneath is a K-Chief 500 display showing a counter image. compressors.5. fans. When doing so. the accumulated values are printed (a post voyage report). All fuel economising measurements and calculations are available as a display window on any of the Operator Stations. 312401/B 31 .System description • Running signal for each propulsion engine • Shaft power (torque) for each propeller shaft • Ship speed Based on these measurements the following performance parameters are calculated: • Momentary fuel consumption for each engine in kg/hrs • Total momentary fuel consumption in kg/hrs • Hull efficiency in kg/nm • Engine efficiency for each engine in g/kWh • Shaft power for each shaft in MW • Total shaft power in MW Fuel consumption and power output is calculated over the voyage period. purifiers. The K-Chief 500 running hours function keeps track of the running hours for selected pumps. generators etc. Two separate counter functions are available: • Counter for total active running hour • Lap counter A table containing all parameters and their running hour values can be printed on demand. When required. Any status signal interfaced to the K-Chief 500 can be used to count running hours..4 Running hours and counters To improve the maintenance plan and to decide which components need overhauling. and present the result to the operator on demand. Accumulated data includes: • Duration of voyage in hours • Distance travelled in nautical miles • Accumulated fuel consumption for each main engine in tons • Total accumulated fuel consumption in tons • Accumulated propeller shaft power in for each shaft in MWh • Total accumulated propeller shaft power in MWh Accumulated values can be reset by the operator. 2. it is important to know the running hours for each component. adjustments can be made to the total running hour or lap counter for any unit.

5 Tank display The K-Chief 500 system has an optional tank level monitoring system. The following information is provided for each tank: • • • • • • • • • Input number for the tank Name of the actual tank Type of tank content American Petroleum Institute (API) density Density in vacuum at 15ºC Density in air at 15ºC Density in air at specified temperature T [ºC] Temperature T [ºC] at which the density above is given Change in density (air) for a change in temperature of 1ºC • Positive value if density is increasing by drop in temperature • Density at actual temperature 32 312401/B . It has different types of standard tank displays: • Cargo tank density display • General tank display • Level/ullage correction display • Ship display Cargo tank density display It displays density calculations and different parameters.5.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 3 Counter display 2.

trim and list • Actual volume in percent of full tank • Actual volume in cubic meter • Specific gravity at actual temperature • Weight in metric tonnes Level correction display This display shows the parameters used for ullage and level correction calculations for each tank. trim and list Ship display It displays the following: • Display of own ship’s main data • Total tank content display • Draught and trim display • Enter/change sea specific gravity • Trim/list type selection 312401/B 33 .System description General tank display The purpose of this display is to show the result of tank calculation for ballast-. sensor offset. The purpose of this display is to give the user a possibility to see the parameters used for the correction. sensor offset. fuel oil and miscellaneous tanks. The following information is provided for each tank: • Input number for the tank • Name of the tank • Type of tank content • Actual level corrected for specific gravity. Information provided in the display: • Input number for the tank • Name of the actual tank • Type of tank content • Measured ullage or level before corrections (this value will be displayed at the corresponding DPU if connected) • Specific gravity at actual temperature (left blank if ullage measuring) • Sensor height above lowest point of tank (left blank if ullage measuring) • Longitudinal correction for level sensor location (left blank if trim tables) • Transverse correction for level sensor location • Actual ullage or level corrected for specific gravity.

Data transfer via CAN bus is the base for easy communication with other Kongsberg systems.5. Water in Oil. Temperature of all bearings and additional measuring points like: Cylinder liner. exhaust gas temperature . allowing integration and joined support. Bearing Monitoring The Kongsberg Bearing Monitoring Systems consist of the PS-10 Bearing Wear Monitoring. Sentry Wireless Temperature Monitoring and PT100 Main Bearing Temperature 34 312401/B .Torque measurement Software and system components are common with K-Chief 500 and AutoChief C20.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2.6 Engine monitoring Kongsberg Engine Monitoring Systems consist of bearing monitoring components covering Bearing Wear.

The Bearing Wear sensor is based on a high quality magnetic sensing element. In combination these solutions will give the most optimal monitoring of crosshead. In this picture bearing monitoring is important. higher output demands. before it becomes critical. due to incorrect reassembly. short –and long term trend and data storage over more than 5 years.e. These functions are also available for other Kongsberg systems that easily can be connected to the BWM computer. Bearing Wear Monitoring The Bearing Wear Monitoring system predicts bearing wear in large two-stroke diesel engines. The system will provide an early warning if any of the three crank-train bearings (crosshead-. the consequential damage to crankshafts and connecting rods may be avoided. In addition the following advantages might be obtained by installing Kongsberg Bearing Monitoring Solutions. experience has showed that some components fail most frequently shortly after an inspection. particularly for critical components are vital. All major engine manufacturers continually work to maintain and improve reliability of existing and future machines in spite of i. The reason for this is firstly that constant monitoring of operating conditions and performance increases the chance of detecting a developing problem at an early stage. In a modern large bore two-stroke diesel engine.and main bearings) has an unexpected bearing problem during service. crank. foreign particles being introduced etc. The measurements take place every time the crosshead passes Bottom Dead Centre (BDC). the reliability. This includes Alarm log. 312401/B 35 . The systems will provide the crew with an early warning if any of the crank train bearings (crosshead-. By providing advanced warning of impending problems. crank.System description Sensors. Both the Kongsberg Bearing Wear Monitoring and the Kongsberg Bearing Temperature Solutions have the function of predicting a bearing damage before it becomes critical.and mean bearing) experience unexpected problems during ship operation. Finally. crank and main bearing wear/temperature on 2-stroke engines. The Kongsberg BWM system complies with MAN specifications on all points. servicing a part only when necessary reduces the owner’s maintenance costs. Secondly. Engine speed is measured continuously to compensate for engine loads and rpm. • Extended time between “open up” intervals of bearings • Reduction of insurance costs The above benefits will call for individual discussions with the relevant Classification Society / Insurance Company.

the radar pulse is picked up and reflected back to the Sentry Signal Processing Unit.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Sentry. A low energy and high frequency radar pulse is transmitted to the Sentry Wireless Sensor via the Sentry Stationary Antenna. The shape and characteristics of the reflected pulse determine the temperature of the sensor. The processing unit software calculates the temperature and transmits this to the engine control and monitoring system. 36 312401/B . The installation of the stationary antenna related to the sensor is flexible and non-critical.e. The sensors are designed to give immediate response to the monitoring system. Wireless temperature monitoring Sentry is designed to monitor the temperature of crank pinand crosshead bearings in diesel engines. When the sensor passes the antenna. The measurement system is based on radar technology with passive sensors without need of an external power source. These bearings can experience rapid temperature changes during damage development. i. the bearing temperature.

thus monitoring the piston running performance in operation. Cylinder Liner Temperature The Cylinder Liner Monitoring system measures temperatures in the upper part of the cylinder liner 5-6 mm from the inner surface.System description Main Bearing temperature Custom designed main bearing temperature sensors can be fitted into any type of 2-stroke diesel engines. Increased friction between the piston rings and the cylinder liner creates an elevated temperature level. 312401/B 37 . The sensors are mounted on the main bearing girder with the tip of the sensor in direct contact with the bearing shell. leading to abnormal wear and eventually to piston breakage. The sensor measures the combined temperatures of the bearing shell and of the lubrication oil that flows from the bearing.

Water in oil detection The quality of the lubrication oil is critical. Scuffing control When scuffing is detected an alarm is given for the related cylinder. an alarm is given for the related cylinder. Scuffing occurs at sub-alarm level temperatures and is recognized by fluctuation temperature readings. When scuffing is detected. Only a small content of water reduces the oils ability to lubricate the bearings. This function is only available in combination with the MAN Diesel Alpha lubricator. When the water content is high enough for the water to segregate from 38 312401/B . An output is then given to the cylinder lubrication system that will increase the amount of cylinder lubrication oil to normalize the condition of the given liner.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Scuffing monitoring and alarm The added Kongsberg software and system components provide detection of cylinder liner scuffing.

This is carried out by measuring exact power transferred to the propeller(s) during the trimming procedure. the light will be pulse modulated by the coding wheels (1) and (2). analogue or digital outputs be connected to the automation system. The principle is as follows: An IR beam is transmitted from the processing unit (8) through optical fibre (3). The processing unit may via serial communication. i. MetaPower is based on a patented LASER technology. In the optical forks (6) and (7) placed in a distance of around 1 m from each other. The life time of a Tin/Aluminium bearing may be reduced to only a few hours. to maintain or increase the speed with less consumption of fuel. torque and power on system level.e. processed and displayed as rpm.System description the oil a rapid corrosive process of the bearings will occur. This measuring point has become standard on all new MAN Diesel engines. 312401/B 39 . MetaPower torque monitoring The intention of MetaPower system is to enable the ship owner to optimize the operation parameters of the ship. The modulation will depend on the shaft speed and torque. The signal is received in the processing unit.

– 15 seconds before the alarm timer expires. To reset the alarm timer.1 About the Bridge Watch Monitoring System The Bridge Watch Monitoring System serves the following purposes: • Central bridge alarm panel provides visual and audible alarms and warnings. automatically initiated in case the bridge alarms are not attended to or an operator disability is detected. • After an additional delay called “Last stage delay”.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2. • Call back-up navigator for purpose of manual and instant initiation of alarm transfer from bridge for alert and call of master and back-up navigator(s). push: – Any external sound off button – Any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring panel The alarm is given as follows: • When the alarm timer has expired in the captains and back-up officers quarters.2 About bridge watch alarms The Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems generates a prewarning and an alarm when the interval timers have expired. The alarm is given in the captain’s and all navigating officer’s quarters and in public areas.6 System functions. The “Last stage delay” is configurable between 0 and 3 minutes.6. a prewarning buzzer starts sounding. a prewarning lamp starts flashing. • Alarm transfer to specific locations outside the bridge to alert and call the master and back-up navigator(s). These are initiated by systems and individual navigation equipment serving primary bridge functions. 2. Bridge Watch Monitoring System 2. – 30 seconds before the alarm timer expires. 40 312401/B .6. • Alarm: The alarm is configurable to sound between 3 and 12 minutes after the last alarm-timer reset. • Prewarning: Prewarnings are only given on the bridge. • Bridge watch monitoring feature for detection of unattended bridge or operator disability based on interval checking.

such as “main engine stopped”. This solution guarantees that local operation is available even if the Operator Stations are not functioning. 2. The operator can adjust the sequence timing. Stand by start at low pressure When the pressure drops below the set limit the stand by pump automatically starts. until the pressure has been built up. “aux engine stopped” or a similar condition. These units are included in a start sequence. Process Control System All data acquisition. signal scaling and process control is performed by each individual Distributed Processing Unit. signal conditioning. The stand by logic can also be inhibited by an external condition.7. Remote control is available from the Operator Stations in two ways: • Through the stand by pump display (mimic diagrams). Alarms from the stand by pump logic • Stand by start alarm • Auto start fail or trip • Non stand by alarm (indicates that a stopped pump is no longer in stand by mode). Sensors: Pressure switches or analogue sensors may be used for the control functions. • Through a (mimic) diagram included in the monitoring and control system. Group start of pumps Remote controlled pumps can be started in sequence.1 Stand-by pumps General Pump control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. Inhibit stand by start Starting of the stand by pump is blocked after a blackout or at a group start.System description 2.7 System functions. Restart after blackout Some units have to be automatically restarted after a blackout. The delay time defined in the Distributed Processing Unit’s pump logic determines the start sequence. 312401/B 41 . The limit may be adjusted if an analogue sensor is used.

2. Close when a “low level” switch opens. This configuration allows the system to work even if one of the Distributed Processing Unit fails. • Automatic closing of a set of valves. Close when a “low level” switch opens.2 Valve control General Valve control is located in the Distributed Processing Units. The stand by pump logic is also active when the Operator Station is down. remote OPEN/CLOSE function.7. • Valve Change-Over on Alarm with Reset. 42 312401/B . the following functions are available as part of the valve control system: • Pulsed output. Double-Acting Valve with Position Control: This valve type is controlled by two digital outputs.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Limits: All limits are downloaded from the Operator Station as part of its database. • Automatic OPEN/CLOSE of Valve Remote OPEN/CLOSE function. The valve position is set within a defined dead band by pulsing a relay. Double-Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by two digital output and two input signals. using deadband. The limits may be adjusted at the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. The valve is opened or closed by pulsing a relay. Valve Types Single Acting Valve: This valve type is controlled by one digital output signal. Remote control is available through the displays on the Operator Stations. the signals from the motor starters and the process are normally routed to different Distributed Processing Units. The valve-position (closed or open) is given by the signals by one or two limit switches. two digital inputs and an analogue input signal. • Close on an analogue setpoint. • Low-level Auto CLOSE Valve. Additional functions In addition. • Automatic opening or closing of valves. Configuration: To maintain redundancy in a two or three pump system.

or valve position control mode. The main purpose is to maintain the air receiver pressure at a constant value.4 Compressor control The compressor control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. Purifier configuration is selected manually by operating different by-pass valves directly. and includes operation of the following equipment: • Crude oil booster pump (optional) • Crude oil temperature controller • Purifiers • Sealing valves • Discharge valves The equipment may be controlled from the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. Cascade control is accomplished by connecting two controllers together. The following parameters are available: • Tuning parameters (gain. All combinations of PID controllers are available.3 PID controllers The PID controller system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. AUTO.System description 2.7. The purifier control program is specially written to operate Alfa Laval’s self cleaning oil purifiers.5 Purifier control The purifier control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit.7. 2. The purifier control program will sense if purifiers are running in series or parallel. This function includes remote manual and automatic start and stop of compressors.7. Mode of operation is indicated in the mimic 312401/B 43 . PD or PID) • Selection of input and output signal type • Input and output channel number • Sampling time 2. The compressor control system communicates with the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station and can be monitored or controlled from here. SEMIAUTO) • Controller types (P. PI. integration time and derivation time) • Controller setpoint • Output mode (true control mode. The PID controllers can be configured from the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station. restart after blackout and automatic drain control.

6 Boiler control The boiler control system is a set of software modules located in the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. 44 312401/B . Purifier no.7. All parameters are found in the steam system display. System information such as alarms and analogue values are part of the normal K-Chief 500 alarm and monitoring system. and provides visible alarms. 2 may be selected to run as purifier or clarifier. and employs a program for controlled shut down. The program consists of a standard PID controller and is adaptable to different types of boilers. 2. The boiler control involves total control of the following equipment: • Fuel oil stand-by pumps • Burner motor • Fuel pre-heater • Nozzles • Ignition unit • Air damper • Steam release valve These units are connected to and controlled by the appropriate Distributed Processing Unit. whereas purifier no. 1 will always run as purifier.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 display by showing the oil path as green lines. The boiler control system uses fail checking extensively. Boiler system parameters are available on the Operator Station or the Midi Operator Station.

The basic system consists of one Distributed Processing Unit per connected generator unit. and allows separation of local PMS CAN process bus data traffic from other parts of the global CAN-network of the K-Chief 500 system. control and safety. • Diesel generator safety system: A separate Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1). Each performs the power management functions of the connected generator unit.8.1 Introduction The Power Management System controls the power generation and distribution on board the vessel. The system is suitable for electrical generators driven by a diesel engine. The Power Management System will be adapted to the specific configuration of power generators and bus bars on the ship. Power Management System 2.System description 2. 312401/B 45 . • PMS control logic: A Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1) for each generator. the dPSC. For complex Power Management Systems an additional Distributed Processing Unit. • Bus-tie control: A Distributed Processing Unit (RiO-C1) for each bus-tie. is used for mode control etc. which allows the operator to initiate the same monitoring and control functions that can be performed locally. It includes all the automatic functions necessary for safe and economic operation of the power plant. these functions have been addressed to separate Distributed Processing Units like this: • Complex logic: A Dual Process Segment Gateway (when needed). In order to comply with the latest rules of separation of functions for alarm. The Distributed Processing Units have different configurations and control strategies depending on the type of drive. The Distributed Processing Units are connected to the Operator Station.8 System functions. • Alarms: Two Rai-16 or Rdi-32 Units. This is a unit giving redundancy both in function and communication. Note These units interact on a dual redundant CAN-bus. a steam turbine or by the propeller shaft.

Load-dependent start/stop of the Stand-by Generators Each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will automatically start. • A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator has developed a fault. the generators swap loads. Symmetric loadsharing If two or more generators are running and asymmetric load-sharing has not been requested. • A start request from another Distributed Processing Unit when its operating generator is approaching the point of overload. deviation of voltage/frequency and breaker. the load is shared equally between the generators. At the expiration of the defined period. 46 312401/B . The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit is the reference for frequency and voltage values. while the second generator is operating at minimal load and fuel consumption. Frequency control and loadsharing When automatic mode is selected. which prevents it from maintaining its share of the load.2 Generator control functions Synchronizing The Power Management System automatically selects and synchronizes generators to the net as required.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2. one of the Distributed Processing Units must be defined as Master. It maintains a constant bus frequency by controlling its engine’s speed.8. Asymmetric loadsharing The Distributed Processing Unit has an asymmetric or unbalanced load-sharing function that will force one generator to run at almost maximum load for a pre-defined period. The Distributed Processing Unit designated as “ No. A Distributed Processing Unit controls speed. The Master mode Distributed Processing Unit controls the bus frequency while the stand-by Distributed Processing Units controls the load-sharing.1 Stand-By” will automatically be master if no other master selection is made. synchronise and connect its generator according to its assigned order-of-priority and whenever it receives one of the following requests: • Switch-on request from the heavy consumer(s) if the generators in operation cannot provide enough power. The bus bar frequency and voltage values from the main switchboard are available in all the Distributed Processing Units.

This feature is especially useful when a heavy consumer (e. the Power Management System will start up and connect a stand-by generator to ensure that sufficient capacity is available before the request for switch-on is granted. Underneath are examples with 1 Shaft Generator (SG). all of the generators controlled by each stand-by Distributed Processing Unit will start and connect to the bus.3 Power management functions with shaft generator Main functions One Distributed Processing Unit controls the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit. Four standard modes are provided. 2 bus-ties and 1 bow thruster. 2. whereas other Distributed Processing Units control the bus-tie breaker and the other auxiliary generators. Supervision of Heavy Consumer switch-on Each Distributed Processing Unit is able to supervise the switch-on control heavy consumers to ensure that a switch-on will not cause a power blackout. If the demand for power exceeds the capacity of the operating generators.g.and stern thrusters • Overall control of the Distributed Processing Units that control the auxiliary generator sets Operational modes and mode control The Power Management System allows many different modes of operation. independent of the load parameters. a ship’s bow thruster) is required to be started instantaneously at irregular intervals.8. (less than 10 % of normal). Automatic start-and-connect after a power blackout The power blackout logic is triggered when the Power Management System detects that all breakers are disconnected and that the line voltage is low. 2 Diesel Generators (DG). The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit logic is adaptable to various switchboard configurations.System description It is possible to override or block the low load auto-stop feature. The following functions are available: • Control of the shaft generator circuit breaker and the bus-tie breaker with automatic synchronisation • Control of the connection and disconnection of bow. 312401/B 47 . the stand-by generator will keep on running. Whenever blocked. In a power blackout situation.

or to split net operation. • At sea: The SG is running. One or two DGs power consumers on port busbar. Both bus-ties are closed. Always when changing mode from shaft generator powering the net. Upon reception of this command. leading to a set of actions which the operator has to perform in order to put the Power Generating System into that mode. Shaft. This one-touch control is to be made from the Operator Station. Shaft Generator overload The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will check for overload of the shaft generator. This is blocked if the thruster is running or the STOP BLOCK switch in the Diesel Generator Distributed Processing Unit is activated. • Manoeuvre: Bus-tie 1 is open. If the load is low. the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit will give a start and connect command to at least two auxiliary generators. If overloaded for more than a pre-defined period of time.and auxiliary generators. leading to a sequence of automatic events to put the Power Generating system into that mode. This mode allows the bow thruster to be started. Both DGs are stopped and stand-by ready for start.and Auxiliary Generators in parallel There is an adjustable time limit for parallel load sharing between shaft. The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing 48 312401/B . the stand-by DG will automatically be disconnected and stopped. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. • Cargo handling: Bus-tie 2 is open. to auxiliary generators powering the net. The bow thruster is blocked for starting. The bus-tie will automatically be disconnected when parallel load sharing exceeds this time limit. a request for split net is generated. The shaft generator power the bow thruster only. Shaft Generator control functions The shaft generator is interfaced to the integrated control and alarm/monitoring system via the Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit. and the bow thruster is not running. the Power Management System will only start one diesel at a time. Both bus-ties are closed. The SG is powering heavy consumers on the stand-by bus bar. Transition between these modes is possible in two ways: • Mode control: Selection of one of the pre-defined operational modes. One or two DGs power consumers on port bus bar. • One-touch mode control: Selection of one of the pre-defined operational modes.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Harbour: Both DGs are running.

The Shaft Generator Distributed Processing Unit and the Distributed Processing Units perform the functions for the Power Management System completely independent of the Alarm and Monitoring System. the following functions are available: • Manual start from keyboard and mimic diagrams • Manual stop from keyboard and mimic diagrams • Automatic stop in case of alarms on main engine or the shaft generator itself • Monitoring of critical parameters when the shaft generator is running (additional function to controller. A speed drop function versus load enable the shaft generator to be run in parallel with diesel generators. The frequency on the bus bar is a result of the ME (Main Engine) speed. the master Distributed Processing Unit will do load sharing on the diesel generator in parallel with the shaft generator.System description Unit has facilities for remote start and stop. 312401/B 49 . When the controller is set to remote operation mode. Parallel load sharing between shaft generator and diesel generators are limited in time. controlled from the Power Management System. with its own safety functions for the shaft generator) When the shaft generator is connected.

consisting of standard main units as Operator Stations.1 Overview This chapter gives a brief description of the main units of the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System. Operator Panels and processing and I/O units. Note The K-Chief 500 is a modular system. the choice and quantities of items may vary and may depend on ship and class.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 UNIT DESCRIPTIONS 3. Topics Operator Station (OS) on page 51 Midi Operator Station (MOS) on page 52 Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 53 Input Panel (INP) on page 54 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) on page 55 Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 56 on page Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) on page 59 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) on page 60 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) on page 64 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) on page 64 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32. For a specific project configuration. RDi-32a) on page 65 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) on page 66 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) on page 66 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) on page 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) on page 68 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) on page 69 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) on page 70 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) on page 71 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) on page 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) on page 72 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) on page 73 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) on page 75 50 312401/B .

Unit descriptions 3. In the Alarm Navigator the alarm group which contains the alarm will start to flicker. providing easy access to the different operator functions. an alarm printer. Figure 4 Operator Station (OS) The Operator Station can be supplied with a printer (for on-demand printing).2. a buzzer is turned on and the Alarm Printer automatically prints the alarm. By clicking on the flickering alarmgroup. more detailed alarm information is displayed on the colour graphics display.2 Operator Stations and Operator Panels 3. Detailed sensor information for any Distributed Process Unit. log printer or colour hard copy unit. several things happens. The alarm is also displayed in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display.1 Operator Station (OS) The Operator Station is a type approved personal computer. connected to a colour graphics display and a printer. Operator input is either done through a standard personal computer keyboard or through specially designed Operator Panels. Sensor data can be presented as a bar graph (analogue sensors) or a trend curve (analogue and digital sensors). such as alarm or normal status data. can also be shown on the colour graphics display. or printed on demand. When a Distributed Process Unit detects an alarm condition. Selected 312401/B 51 .

Counter values are shown on the colour graphics display or may be printed. The Operator Station is used when transferring machinery watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room.2. The Midi Operator Station contains a symbol library for presentation of process control equipment and uses these to display mimic diagrams. pumps and related items.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 sensor data may be printed automatically at fixed intervals. For small alarm systems it can be the only Operator Station. This function can also accumulate flow. A counter function keeps track of running hours for engines. It allows alarm indication. from a single input signal to a controllable object 52 312401/B . such as alarm acknowledgements and alarm condition cleared.2 Midi Operator Station (MOS) The Midi Operator Station is a multipurpose Operator Station designed to be placed anywhere on the ship. may be called to the engine control room in case of an emergency. process control and power management. even out on deck. All available engineers. the system returns to normal. When all alarm conditions are cleared. Figure 5 Alarm and Monitoring System (cJoy) The Midi Operator Station gives the operator the possibility to: • Monitor the status of any object. The logging printer and the colour graphics display records all status changes. The system can display the latest alarms for each alarm group individually or all active alarms. 3. Operation is performed through a set of function keys and a high resolution colour graphical display. Alarm limits and delays are adjustable by using the Operator Panel. whether on duty or not. and selecting the engineer for watch-call duty.

3 Control Room Panel (CRP) The Control Room Panel (CRP) contains the following: • A 19 buttons keypad for screen navigation. through visual and audible signals • Interface to a printer for alarm logging purposes • Control the process through built-in pushbuttons and graphical feedback • Reconfigure the distributed database located in the Distributed Processing Units. for instance in the alarm and panel area. • A command area containing three command buttons (TAKE. 3. entering numbers and text into the system • A trackball with seven buttons integrated in the circular trackball cover • An alarm area containing three alarm buttons and an alarm lamp (ACK. but are not used for Alarm and Monitoring Systems without Process Control and Power Management. through numeric and alphanumeric inputs. • A panel area containing three status lamps (POWER. They are related to access and control transfer.Unit descriptions • Be informed of any process. 312401/B 53 . But the CRP have LED indicators.or system alarm. FAULT and ALARM) The CRP do not have background light. It is meant to be placed in a room with light. “Silence" and ALARM VIEW). like the control room. GIVE and STATUS). The CRP is powered from 24 Vdc.2.

2.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 6 Control Room Panel (CRP) 3. A light sensor registers the light intensity above the panel and can be used for controlling background light and status lamps automatically. The Input Panel is powered from 24 Vdc.4 Input Panel (INP) The Input Panel contains a 19 buttons keypad for screen navigation. entering numbers and text into the system It has also a trackball with seven buttons integrated in the circular trackball cover. 54 312401/B . The background light can be dimmed from the Operator Station which the panel is a part of.

and it displays and sounds system status by its status lamps and buzzers. • Three alarm buttons (ACK. FAULT and ALARM) • Three command buttons (TAKE. 312401/B 55 . “Silence" and ALARM VIEW). but are not used for Alarm and Monitoring Systems without Process Control and Power Management.5 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) The ALC Panel is used for Command Control and Alarm Control by pushing dedicated buttons. The ALC Panel is powered and communicates through a single USB cable. The light intensity of the background light and the status lamps can be dimmed from the Operator Station which the panel is a part of. The ALC Panel contains the following controls and indicators: • Three status lamps (POWER. and an alarm lamp.2.They are related to access and control transfer.Unit descriptions Figure 7 Input Panel (INP) 3. GIVE and STATUS).

the Alarm Navigator and the Graphic Display Navigator. so it can be adjusted for use during day and night time. The TCP is easy to install into a console. It is mounted smoothly using four bolts.6 Touch Control Panel (TCP) The Touch Control Panel (TCP) is used to interact with the images on the colour monitor of the Operator Station of the K-Chief 500 system. 56 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 8 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) 3. The Navigator is constantly displayed to give easy access to all the information of the K-Chief 500 system. It is also dimmable. one in each corner. To reduce the reflective shine from the sun.2. the TCP is anti-glare. The TCP frame is made of aluminium and stainless steel. The rear has several apertures for sufficient ventilation. The image on the TCP is called the Navigator and is divided in two parts.

Unit descriptions Figure 9 Touch Control Panel (TCP) 312401/B 57 .

The repeat alarm feature distributes the alarms using three sequences to ensure that the alarm will not go unacknowledged: First-time/original alarm The first-time/original alarm is relayed to: 58 312401/B .2 Watch Calling repeat alarm feature The repeat alarm feature of the Watch Calling System monitors all responses to an alarm condition to ensure that the alarm is acknowledged. It consists of: • Watch Bridge Units (WBU) • Watch Cabin Units (WCU) • Operator Stations The main purposes of Watch Bridge Units are: • To indicate the Watch Responsible area • To indicate who is On Duty • To indicate the current alarm status • To sound a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs and someone is On Duty • To allow you to contact (call) duty personnel.3.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3. and/or all personnel The main purposes of Watch Cabin Units are: • To indicate who is On Duty • To indicate the current alarm status • To indicates when you are being called and who is calling • To sound a buzzer whenever a new alarm condition occurs Figure 10 Basic Watch Calling System components 3.3 Watch Calling System 3.3.1 Purpose The watch calling system is designed to allow the engine room and the control room to be periodically unmanned.

LCD type 312401/B 59 . an LED and a LCD type. it is repeated and relayed to: • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas Third-time/2nd repeat alarm If the alarm is still not acknowledged.3 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) Two different types of Watch Bridge Units exist. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text.Unit descriptions • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The On Duty engineers Watch Cabin Units • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas Second-time/1st repeat alarm If the alarm remains unacknowledged after a set period of time. Figure 11 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU). it is repeated and relayed to: • The area designated as Watch Responsible • The Watch Cabin Units for ALL QUALIFIED engineers • The Watch Cabin Units in all public areas 3.3. after a set period of time. Both are used to indicate and accept the transfer of machine watch responsibility between bridge and engine control room.

They are placed in the engineer’s cabins and in public areas. LED type When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility. A general alarm signal will call them to the engine control room if an alarm condition arises. or the situation is cleared. Alarm indication can be provided when the bridge is not having the machinery watch. an LED and a LCD type. 60 312401/B . 3. Indicators show when an alarm has been acknowledged in the engine control room but the buzzer will not sound.4 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) Two different types of Watch Cabin Units exist.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 12 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU). one or more engineers must be on call.3. The K-Chief 500 prevents the bridge from assuming watch responsibility if no engineers are assigned to on call duty. appropriate indications are given on the Watch Bridge Unit. The bridge personnel may call the engineers on-duty in their quarters at any time. The alarm indication on the Watch Bridge Unit is a buzzer sound and a single or group alarm lamp which is flashing. Both are used to indicate engine room alarms. Acknowledgement of such calls is provided. When an alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room. The LED type has more alarm indicators and the LCD type has a display to show alarms in clear text. for consultation etc.

LED type To set the machinery watch responsibility system to bridge mode one or more engineers must be on call. The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Units are that a buzzer sounds and a single or group alarm lamp is flashing.Unit descriptions Figure 13 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU). When the bridge has the machinery watch responsibility. one or more engineers must be on call. When an alarm situation occur the alarm signal will be given. The engineer will then normally go to the engine control room to find the cause of the alarm. LCD type Figure 14 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU). The visual alarm indication on the Watch Cabin Unit consists of single or group alarm lamps. When an alarm condition arises a general alarm signal is sounded in the duty engineer’s cabins and in the public areas. 312401/B 61 . both in the duty-engineers cabin and in the public areas.

62 312401/B . Alarm indication without sounding the buzzer is configurable when the Watch Calling System is in off-duty mode.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 When the alarm is acknowledged in the engine control room. or the situation is cleared. the alarm condition is cleared from the Watch Cabin Units. the alarm signal is repeated in the engineers’ quarters. until it is acknowledged. and on the bridge. If the engineer does not acknowledge within a specified period of time. The system can also be used to call an engineer to the bridge or the engine control room without an alarm condition.

I/O and process-bus. Status information is continuously monitored by the K-Chief 500 Operator Stations through the system network. Run. The main functions of the Distributed Processing Units are to monitor analogue or digital sensors and to provide analogue and digital output to different devices. Unwanted alarms are inhibited during start-up and shut-down of the machinery.4 Distributed Processing Units 3. jumpers or sockets • No additional EMC protection required (only IP) • Time synchronisation • Non-volatile memory • Remote alarms function • Dual CAN-bus interfaces • Software can be downloaded into the unit • Built In Self-Test (BIST) monitoring temperature. The main characteristics of the Distributed Processing Units are: • LED indicators on the housing for Watch-Dog. identifies the responsible sensor. and provides information about the condition. 312401/B 63 . dip switches. power and sensor excitation overload • All parameters are stored in each unit • Each unit is remotely configurable • No serviceable parts inside • All connections are pluggable Each Distributed Process Unit contains its own microprocessor. the Distributed Process Unit and K-Chief 500 generates an alarm signal.1 Main characteristics A number of different Distributed Processing Units (DPU) are available for different tasks. power and process-bus • Single printed circuit board design • Easy service replacement without setting trimmers.4. All units have the same mechanical construction and are built using the same electronic design principles. These are programmed for a number of different tasks such as detecting when a monitored signal move outside set limits. unit initialised and power polarity • Three-way isolation between I/O and power. General information. When an unacceptable condition is detected.Unit descriptions 3.

It also incorporates a 5 to 500Hz counter channel. 0 to + 600 °C. the use of external Thermo Coupler amplifiers and RAi-16 is recommended.4. error handling Figure 15 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) 3. If external compensation is needed. Each channel is selectable as voltage. It is used for temperature measurements with Thermo Coupler (TC) elements of different types. It is particularly suited to monitor engine exhaust temperatures. with ranges ± 50. A large variety of temperature elements can be connected.001 seconds) • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status. ± 200.4.3 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) This unit has 10 analogue input channels.2 Remote Analogue input (RAi-16) This unit has 16 analogue input channels. • 16 analogue or digital input channels • Scaled in technical units • 1 counter 5 to 500 Hz • Limit check • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events (0. • 10 thermo-coupler input channels • Scaled in technical units • Limit check • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events 64 312401/B . current and resistance input in different ranges and has free technical units scaling. A Cold Junction Compensation function is included.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3.

RDi-32a) These units have 32 digital input channels/dry contacts and include LED status indicators. error handling Figure 16 Remote Analogue input (RAi-10tc) 3. error handling Figure 17 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32) 312401/B 65 .Unit descriptions • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status. • 32 digital input channels with LED status indicators • Input dry contacts • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status.4 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32.4.

6 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) The RDo-16 module has 16 digital output channels and includes LED status indicators.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 18 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32a) 3. Each channel is selectable for voltage or current output in different ranges and almost free technical units scaling. The maximum voltage is 230 VAC. • Change over.5 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) This unit has 8 analogue output channels. brake before make relay-contacts • Pulse on output • Pulse off output 66 312401/B .4.4. error handling Figure 19 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8) 3. This module is suited to drive analogue indicators. The maximum output current for each channel is 3 Amperes (resistive load). By placing the module close to instruments. long cables can be avoided. • 8 analogue output channels • ± 10 VDC / ±20 mA • CAN net status.

312401/B 67 . measuring rotating speed of any machinery. Based on these signals the following values can be measured and calculated: • AC voltage available from generator and busbar • AC current supplied from the generator • AC frequency of generator and busbar • Phase angle between AC voltages. for synchronising circuit breakers • Phase angle between AC voltage and current. It is particularly suited for electric generator control. kVAr • Active load calculation based on AC voltage.7 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) The RIO-C1 is a highly flexible input/output Distributed Processing Unit. The two analogue output channels can drive any indicator by either voltage or current. in the speed range of 0 – 1500 Hz. main engine or auxiliary engine safety systems.Unit descriptions • CAN net status. The unit can further control six digital output channels. current and phase angle The unit can be connected to dual pick-ups. The unit can connect to single-phase AC voltage and a current signal. error handling Figure 20 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16) 3. 2-pole relay (normal open/normal closed) or solenoid valve driver with built-in loop fail detection facilities. for calculating reactive load. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage.4. The unit is equipped with four input channels. which can be individually configured to handle both analogue and digital signals.

AC voltage (1-phase) Analogue input. 1 A. 30 Vrms. The unit is equipped with eight digital input channels which are galvanically isolated between the sensor signals. flexible Input from pickup Digital input Solenoid valve driver or relay. The digital input sensor can be either a potential free contact (switch) or an external 24 VDC or 24 VAC signal. input and output channels with LED status indicator • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status. the electronic 68 312401/B . max 3 A resistive load mA Max.4. 50/60 Hz Max.8 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) The RIO-C2 is a combination module for digital inputs and outputs. 50/60 Hz As RAi-16 24 VDC (counter input) As RDI-32 • 21 analogue or digital.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Table 1 Number of channels 6 2 2 1 4 2 4 RIO-C1 Process Connections Function Level Digital output Analogue output Analogue input. AC current Analogue/digital input. When the faulty sensor interface has returned to normal. error handling Figure 21 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) 3. Each channel has an electronic fuse to protect the electronics against damage.

to be independent of external indicators. It is particularly suited for control of pumps and valves. The in.Unit descriptions fuse is automatically reset.and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers as well as switchboard equipment. The unit can control eight digital output channels.9 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) The RIO-C3 module is designed for protection of marine generators.4. • Short circuit tripping of generator CB • Over current tripping of generator CB • Reverse power tripping of generator CB • Optional differential current protection • Local indication of reason for trip • Local reset of tripping 312401/B 69 . • 8 input and 8 output channels with LED status indicator • 8 channels relays change over. 2-pole relays (normal open/normal closed). with possibility for 24 VDC live input or dry contacts • Alarm and monitoring for all channels • Trend • Time stamp of alarms and events • Self checking • Sensor excitation power overload • CAN net status. brake before make • 8 channels digital inputs. The module has a 7-segment display trip indicator. The RIO-C3 module is available in two versions: • C3-GP for generator protection • C3-GDCP for generator and differential current protection The module has a dual 24 Vdc power connection to un-interruptible power supply and generator voltage. error handling Figure 22 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) 3.

• Synchronize and connect of generator CB • Synchronize and connect of bus-tie CB • Start and stop of auxiliary diesel engine • RPM set point control of auxiliary diesel engine • Optional control of primer pump for AE • Optional control of fuel selection for AE • Calculation of generator load (kW.4. kVAr) • Calculation of phase angle between voltage and current (cosine φ) Figure 23 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) 3.and outputs are designed for interfacing to voltage and current transformers. kVAr) • Driving MSB instruments (kW.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Calculation of generator load (kW.10 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) The C4 module is designed for control of marine generators and bus-tie breakers. as well as switchboard equipment. kVAr) • Load sharing between generators • AVR set point control (optional) Figure 24 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) 70 312401/B . The in.

All communication ports on the module are isolated. • Time stamp of alarms and events (0. The MSI 12 is designed to meet the requirements to signal interfaces as required to voyage data recorders as specified by IMO. • Limit check. • Alarm and monitoring for all channels. global • 2 serial lines. Figure 25 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) 3. RS422/485. It is 4 NMEA ports for receiving.11 Digital Governor Unit (DGU) The DGU module is designed to communicate with external equipment on serial line or CAN. 4 NMEA ports for NMEA I/O communication. • Self checking.001 seconds). The digital signal inputs and outputs are powered from a separate 24 VDC input.12 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) The MSI 12 is a module for interfacing NMEA interfaces for recording and transmission of data. • Trend. • Scaled in technical units. error handling. Main features • 2 CAN Communication channels • 2 CAN Communication channels. The modules connections are powered and communicates using USB interface to the computer.4. 4 Digital I/O and 10 digital output on the MSI 12.Unit descriptions 3. • CAN net status.4. 312401/B 71 . and to communicate with ROS on global CAN.

The maximum length of one CAN segment at 125 kBaud is 530 m.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 26 Multiple Serial Interface Module (MSI 12) • Self check • Remote configurable • No trimmers or jumpers • No serviceable parts • All connections plugable • Type approved 3. The Process Segment Starcoupler protects two sections of a CAN segment from each other. 72 312401/B .13 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) The CAN line is vulnerable to both short-circuit and non-terminal line conditions. Thus short-circuit or malfunction on one CAN terminal does not affect the other CAN terminals. Each terminal on the Process Segment Starcoupler is based on the ISO 11898 standard. with optical isolation. The Process Segment Starcoupler also protects the terminals against dominant bits that are not part of a CAN message. For that reason it is advised to use the Process Segment Starcoupler to split two sections of a process segment. where the segment is running through rough environment or fire zones. A segment going through a Process Star Coupler is limited to 515 m.4. A short-circuit or a broken line will disable the entire CAN segment. This length is the maximum line length between any two nodes in the CAN segment.

The module handles three major tasks: • To supply the C3 generator protection module with AC voltage from the measured three phase generator bus bars.14 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) The VCC-440 module is designed for use in main switchboards. L1-L2.4. derated from 440 to 24 VAC • To supply the C3 generator protection module with 24 VDC power (1 A). derated from 440 to 24 VAC As an option. the VCC module can be equipped with transformers for 690 VAC.Unit descriptions Figure 27 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS) 3. The VCC-440 module is equipped with six voltage transformers to transform from 440 to 24 VAC. The module secures the installation of the power management and generator protection system by transforming the higher voltages to low and safe levels. Figure 28 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) 312401/B 73 . L1-L3 and L2-L3. using the generator busbar (L2-L3) as source • To supply the C4 power management module with a single phase AC voltage from the generator busbar L1-L2 and the switchboard busbar L1-L2.

Its main task is to receive messages from the two CAN-buses and update the Operator Stations. Handling of operator commands and down-loading of parameters and software from the Operator Stations to the nodes (Distributed Processing Units) are handled as well.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3.5.2 The System Gateway (SGW) The System Gateway is a four channel CAN-bus to dual Local Area Network gateway. Watch Bridge Unit. Both units provide a service to protect all nodes (Distributed Processing Units. All necessary configuration and software installation is done through the Local Area Network.1 Gateway types Two types of gateways are available: • System Gateway (SGW) – The SGW is used as a redundant gateway between the CAN-bus and the Local Area Network. The Dual Process System Controller may also be equipped with supervisory control logic for particularly demanding tasks. 3. Watch Cabin Units and Operator Panels) connected to the CAN-bus.5 Gateways 3. The converter function will pre-process CAN messages and load them into a local database for distribution. typically messages for inhibiting or blocking alarms during start-up or shut-down. Global messages are data messages needed in more than one bus segment.5. sending and receiving data between any of its CAN channels and units having Process Data Segment located on the Local Area Network. The Simple Network Management Protocol is implemented to gain access via the 74 312401/B . The System Gateway will route global CAN-bus messages between the four CAN-buses. The System Gateway functions as an intelligent message converter. while maintaining redundancy. The main purposes of both units are to provide galvanic isolation between different parts of the network and to segregate process bus traffic in large systems. The opposite way the converter will convert messages from Process Data Segment and route them to the relevant node (Distributed Processing Units or Local Operator panels). If the communication with one node fails. • Dual Processing System Controller (dPSC) – The dPSC is used as a redundant gateway between two CAN segments (sections of the CAN-bus). the gateway will generate a system failure message identifying the node and the failure. Messages are then converted between the network parts.

Figure 29 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) The main features of the dPSC are: • Dual two channel CAN gateway with separate and galvanic isolated processors • Possible to power the two processors from separate power supplies • High speed data-link between the two processors 312401/B 75 .3 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) The dual Process Segment Controller is a dual two channel CAN gateway.Unit descriptions Local Area Network to System Gateway and CAN diagnostic databases. In this way the two processors are able to run in parallel and provide redundancy both for CAN-bus communication and for logic functions. 3. It consist of two processors. The two processors have separate power connections. In this way the dual Process Segment Controller operates as a running back-up. Galvanic isolation is provided between the power connections and the CAN-bus and between the two CAN-buses. The main function is to process messages from the local CAN-bus segment and send them on the global CAN bus.5. When the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling a set of Distributed Processing Units. It handles operator commands and down-loading of parameters and software from any System Gateway or Operator Station to the Distributed Processing Units connected to the local CAN-bus. Galvanic isolation is provided between the 24 Vdc power input and the System Gateway interfaces. each with two CAN interfaces. both processors are working in parallel running the same process algorithm. where they are available for other dual Process Segment Controllers and System Gateways. and they share information via dual port memory. The dual Process Segment Controller is equipped with a dual serial interface (RS–422/RS–485). primarily designated to communicate with other vendor’s equipment.

galvanic isolated. RS–422/RS–485. they are working in parallel running the same process algorithm. 76 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • A node with CANopen master capability on all four CAN channels • Redundant routing of messages between local and global CAN segments • Dual serial interface. to communicate with other vendor’s equipment • Various redundant application process control logic When the two processors in the dual Process Segment Controller is controlling the same Distributed Processing Unit.

include a number of standard display pictures for common information from the engine and surrounding equipment.1 Overview The standard K-Chief 500 hardware user interface consists of a colour monitor screen. 4.User interface 4 USER INTERFACE 4.3 Process mimics. bar graphs and status displays The system can. One or more Operator Panels are used to interact with these images. Alarm windows include: • Alarm group display • Alarm summary. the panel’s control functions can be inhibited. as an option.1. The standard mimic windows are: • Exhaust gas temperatures and average temperature bar graph • Bar graphs 312401/B 77 .1. The monitor is used to display the operator images of the K-Chief 500 system.1 Operator functions The following main functions are accessible from the Operator Panels: • Alarm display selection and acknowledgement • Set-up and selection of information to be monitored • Set-up and activation of logging (printing) • Parameter adjustment • Extended alarm and watch-calling functions When only monitoring facilities are required. 4. containing a continuous list of time-stamped alarm messages Monitoring windows include: • Group display containing a list of all measuring points within an alarm group • Information display for a selected point • Tag details giving detailed information about each measuring point in the system 4.2 Alarm and monitoring display A number of display windows are available for presenting alarms and monitored values. an Operator Panel and an alphanumeric keyboard. containing a list of all active alarms messages • Alarm history. The alphanumeric keyboard is used for set-up and configuration purposes.1.

power and sensor excitation of each DPU. The autolog and the selected points log can also be configured to be printed at specified intervals.4 Logging and hard copy All logs can be printed on request. Changes of limits or parameters are also guarded through the use of passwords.5 Self-checking and diagnostics The on-line Built In Self-Test (BIST) system monitors the temperature.1. % filling etc.6 Access control In order to limit or enable control of the process from any Operator Station. thus allowing operation of the equipment.1. 4. As an option. All alarms are printed in red. 4. They are interactive. an advanced password system is available. the electronics is automatically tested when power is turned on. running/stopped. Testing of the Operator Stations and their ability to give alarms according to the requirements is initiated by clicking on the thumbnail called: ALARM TEST. 78 312401/B .). In addition.1. This thumbnail can be found in the Navigator under the main group called: SERVICE. customised mimic diagrams will be designed for each project according to the piping diagrams. All operator actions can be logged with time tags (optional). These display windows show the status of the equipment (open/closed. a separate deskjet printer can be fitted to print mimic display windows.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Trend curves In addition. 4.

Each of these areas has a separate function and they are updated independently of each other. monitoring etc.2 Image types in the main window The various system images displayed in the main window are for example: 312401/B 79 .2 System images 4.2. • Function window: Displays information related to user input. 4. • Main window: Contains the image which displays information such as alarmlists. trends.User interface 4.1 Display layout The Operator Station screen display is divided into different fixed areas. See Display layout on page 79 for an illustration. The information displayed varies according to the type of command or task being performed. These contains important status information for user settings.2. • Alarm window: Displays the last four alarms independent of the information displayed in the main window. • Time window: Shows current date and time. Figure 30 Display layout • Title window: Contains the title of the information currently shown in the main window • Status window: The status window is divided into two columns.

Figure 31 Process image 4.4 List image The List image provides a sortable tabular view.3 Process image The Process image provides an enhanced graphical presentation of some parts of a process. Elements of the image can be linked to one or several function modules.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Process image • List image • Trend image • Monitoring image • System configuration image • PDF viewer • Navigator image 4. An example of a Process image is shown below. Two examples of List images are shown below.2. 80 312401/B . containing selected information from the tags in the system.2.

User interface Figure 32 Alarm history Figure 33 Alarm summary 312401/B 81 .

short trend and long trend.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 4. and each trend may in turn contain several trend curves.5 Trend image A Trend image fills the main view area. The K-Chief 500 has two types of trends.2. Figure 34 Long trend image 82 312401/B . An example of a Trend image is shown below. The image may have different presentations.

Figure 35 Group list image 312401/B 83 .2. An example of a monitoring image is shown underneath.6 Monitoring image There are several monitoring images in the K-Chief 500 system.User interface 4.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 4.7 System configuration image The System configuration images show the operational status information of all system components within the automation system. An example of a System configuration image is shown below. Figure 36 System configuration image 84 312401/B . The lines between the equipment illustrate the communication network.2.

The print function is located at the left side of the window. A search function is also available in the PDF viewer. A page or a dialogue can be printed from the document by clicking on the Print Page button or Print Dialogue. An example of the PDF viewer is shown below. The document can now be opened from the document list. Figure 37 PDF viewer image 312401/B 85 . on the left side of the window. To add a PDF document. Type the word or the sentence you want to find and click on the All button.2.User interface 4. located in the upper left corner of the window. The search function is located under the printing function. the document must be copied into this directory: c:\ros\config\doc Remember to click Refresh List to be able to view the latest copied document.8 PDF viewer The PDF viewer is a tool in the Navigator used to open PDF documents. Select the wanted part of the document from the resulting list.

2. The image appears also at the Operator Station when the Home button on the Control Room Panel(CRP)/Input Panel(INP) is pushed. Favorites.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 4. Below is an example of how the Navigator may look like. If there are more than twelve main groups in the system. press one of the alphanumeric keys (1 to 9) to jump to the corresponding sub-group. The different alarmgroups can be selected in the Alarm Navigator. The Navigator is divided in 2 function areas. Figure 38 Navigator image 86 312401/B . the Graphic Display Navigator and the Alarm Navigator. such as List views. Clicking on one of the main groups will give access to the sub-groups. the Page Up and Page Down buttons can be used to toggle between the groups. In the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator you have the main groups. The Navigator gives access to all system displays. etc. These sub-groups are called Graphic Display Thumbnails.9 Navigator The Navigator is the image on the Touch Control Panel. For easy navigation. Misc.

The first image is an example of a Thermal oil primary system. there may not be enough room to display all the details on a single screen. The system is designed in a way which gives varying levels of detail about the process depending on which image is selected.2. The second image appears when the grey button down to the right on the first image is pushed. This is exemplified by the following two images. The second image displays details of one Cargo heating secondary system. The K-Chief 500 system will then have a number of images linked to the main image in order to show these details.10 How processes are displayed and controlled The number of images in a system depends on the amount of equipment under K-Chief 500 control.User interface 4. Figure 39 Primary system image (Thermal oil) 312401/B 87 . When an image showing an overall process is selected.

88 312401/B . although this can be arranged if required.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 40 Secondary system image (Cargo Heating) Normally not more than two levels of images will be used.

It is a useful tool to avoid misunderstanding and lack of information.3 ShipViewer ShipViewer is a software package that runs on a standard personal computer connected to the K-Chief 500 local area network. Main functions include: • Presentation of logged ship data and mimic diagrams • Presentation of alarms • Presentation of alarm history • Status on open/closed valves. The computer can be installed anywhere on the ship. The following systems can be monitored through the ShipViewer.User interface 4. running/stopped equipment etc. 312401/B 89 . mimic diagrams. It has similar viewing capabilities as those found in the Operator Station. logged data and allows convenient printing facilities. dependent on the system configuration: • Engine monitoring and control system • Power management system • Fire system • Tank system The system presents online data. but no control functions.

The following subjects are covered: Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 91 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 95 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) on page 97 Using the Input Panel (INP) on page 100 Using the Midi Operator Station on page 103 Using the Watch Bridge Unit on page 107 Using the Watch Cabin Unit on page 110 90 312401/B . It is intended for personnel just having started to use the system.1 Operator stations and panels This chapter teaches you how to use the control functions and displays of the different K-Chief 500 Operator Stations and panels.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 GETTING STARTED 5.

The button groups are explained below.2. The following illustration shows the layout of the CRP.2.2 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP) 5. The different buttons found on the panel can be divided into groups. It is divided into separate function areas.1 Understanding the CRP The CRP is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions.Getting started 5.2 ALARM group buttons and lamp The ALARM group comprises one lamp and three buttons. 312401/B 91 . Figure 41 Control Room Panel (CRP) layout 5.

2. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated GIVE Push this button to give access/control. or it is turned off. The window contains information of for example who has controll/access. and the alarm text will change colour to indicate the acknowledgement. 5. STATUS When the status button is pushed. ALARM VIEW The alarm view button opens the alarm summary when it is pushed. ACK When the ACK button is pushed. The lamp is steadily lit when the ACK button has been pressed and the alarm is still active. POWER The lamp is lit green when the panel is on. They are used to transfer access and control. See Alarm text colour on page 28 for more information on alarm colours and effects of acknowledge alarms in different images. 92 312401/B .2. This is only used on systems with Power Management System (PMS) and/or Process Control TAKE Push this button to request access/control. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated. and the power is OK.4 COMMAND group buttons and lamps The COMMAND group comprises two buttons with lamps and one button without a lamp. a window will be opened. The alarm buzzer will be silent. SOUND OFF When the sound of button is pushed. the alarm will be acknowledge. 5.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 ALARM LAMP The lamp is blinking red when an alarm has been detected. Two things will happen simultaneously. the alarm sound will be silent. FAULT The lamp is lit red when it has lost contact with the computer.3 PANEL group lamps The PANEL group comprises two lamps.

Pushing two times. 8/tuv. and not lit when it is in numeric mode (numbers). abc. When alphanumeric mode is selected. a. This is the abc. 5/jkl.. c. HOME This button is used to return to the Navigator window. This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode. 4/ghi. (The same applies for the following buttons: 3/def. numeric or alphanumeric mode. b. (Same function as on a standard keyboard) ENTER This button is used the same way as the enter button on a standard keyboard. Three pushes enters the letter. 7/pqr.. (toggle) button.. PAGE DOWN This button is used to scroll down in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). 9/wxyz. is entered if the button is pushed when the numeric mode is chosen. For example use the enter button to confirm a new entered value instead of clicking on the OK softbutton.Getting started 5. is entered.2. 2 / abc The result of pushing this button depends on which mode the panel is in. 312401/B 93 . 6/mno.. A short beep will confirm the change. 2. The lamp intensity can be adjusted from the computer. BACKSPACE This button moves the cursor one position backward and deletes this preceding character.) The number. The lamp is lit green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters). For example use the escape button to exit from Tagdetails and return to the alarm history list. One of these has a lamp. will be entered by pushing one time at the button. the letter. PAGE UP This button is used to scroll up in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history). the letter.5 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s) The INPUT group comprises 19 buttons. Press the button for one second to toggle. Numeric mode is default. ESCAPE The ESC button is used the same way as an ESC button on a standard keyboard. Most common use is to exit/cancel/stop.

The sounder can be silenced both when power is lost and by the local controller. Three of these buttons are the mouse buttons in front. They work like the arrow buttons on a standard alphanumeric keyboard. Trackball It is used for navigation on the screen. The sound intensity is controlled by the number of buzzers activated.).8 Temperature sensor A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. to alarm when power is lost (sounds for at least 60 sec. Mouse buttons Same function as an ordinary PC-mouse. The other four are located on each side of the trackball . One is controlled directly by power. and also by the local controller as the two others.2. 94 312401/B . 5.6 Trackball There are a total of seven buttons around the trackball .2. Arrow buttons On each side of the trackball are the arrow buttons.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5.2. and the intensity setting can be configured.7 Buzzer There are three buzzers. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit. 5. a system alarm is given.

3. 312401/B 95 . In this case the softbuttons on the upper part of the Alarm Navigator can be used to toggle between the different alarm group lists. Some K-Chief 500 systems may have many alarm groups.Getting started 5. The different areas found on the panel can be divided into groups. Beside each alarmgroup is the number of alarms which are not attended to displayed.1 Understanding the TCP The TCP is a specially designed panel which provides easy access to the operator functions. There is also a viewing of the number of alarms not acknowledged in each list on these softbuttons. The following illustration shows the layout of the TCP. Figure 42 Touch Control Panel (TCP) layout 5.3.3 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) 5. These groups are explained and illustrated below. It is divided into separate function areas. the number shown to the right of the corresponding alarm group will flicker.2 Alarm Navigator The Alarm Navigator gives easy access to the different alarm groups in the system. When an alarm is not acknowledged.

History. page up and page down softbuttons are then used to get access A K-Chief 500 system may have more than 12 main groups.3 Graphic Display Navigator The upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator holds softbuttons for the main groups.3. List Views etc. the corresponding Graphic Display Thumbnail will appear under the main group area. 96 312401/B . By touching one of these softbuttons. for example Favourites. In the main group area is also a softbutton called. By touching a Graphic Display Thumbnail the wanted information for that view will be displayed on the monitor of the Operator Station (OS). When this softbutton is touched. The to all the main groups.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5. the nine last thumbnails that the operator has opened are displayed.

and the alarm text will change colour to indicate the acknowledgement.4 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) 5.Getting started 5. The different buttons found on the panel are explained below. The following illustration shows the layout of the ALC.4. The lamp is steadily lit when the ACK button has been pressed and the alarm is still active. Two things will happen simultaneously.2 ALARM group buttons and lamps The ALARM group comprises one lamp.1 Understanding the ALC The ALC is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. the alarm will be acknowledge.4. ACK When the ACK button is pushed. The alarm buzzer will be silent. See Alarm text colour on page 28 for more 312401/B 97 . ALARM LAMP The lamp is blinking red when an alarm has been detected. Figure 43 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) layout 5. three buttons without lamp.

4 COMMAND group buttons and lamps The COMMAND group comprises two buttons with lamps and one button without a lamp. If power is lost. The window contains information of for example who has controll/access. or it is turned off. 5.4.4. the alarm sound will be silent. One of them is. The background light intensity can be adjusted from the computer via USB and is implemented locally using PWM. POWER The lamp is lit green when the panel is on. a window will be opened.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 information on alarm colours and effects of acknowledge alarms in different images. 5. controlled directly by power.6 Buzzer There are three buzzers. They are used to transfer access and control. 5.4. STATUS When the status button is pushed. SOUND OFF When the sound of button is pushed. an alarm sounds for at least 60 seconds. The sound 98 312401/B . in addition. 5.4. FAULT The lamp is lit red when it has lost contact with the computer. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated.3 PANEL group lamps The PANEL group comprises two lamps. ALARM VIEW The alarm view button opens the alarm summary when it is pushed. The lamp is lit green when the button has been activated GIVE Push this button to give access/control.5 Background light The background light is integrated in the panel film and has yellow colour. This is only used on systems with Power Management System (PMS) and/or Process Control TAKE Push this button to request access/control. and the power is OK. All are controlled by the local controller.

Getting started

intensity is controlled by the number of buzzers activated, and the intensity setting can be configured. The sounder can be silenced both when power is lost and by the local controller.

5.4.7 Temperature sensor
A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit, a system alarm is given.

312401/B

99

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

5.5 Using the Input Panel (INP)
5.5.1 Understanding the INP
The INP is a specially designed keyboard which provides easy access to the operator functions. The following illustration shows the layout of the INP. The different buttons found on the panel are explained below. Figure 44 Input Panel (INP) layout

5.5.2 INPUT group buttons and lamp(s)
The INPUT group comprises 19 buttons.
HOME

This button is used to return to the Navigator window.
abc...

This button toggles between numeric and alphanumeric mode. Numeric mode is default. Press the button for one second to toggle. A short beep will confirm the change. The lamp is lit green when the panel is in alphanumeric mode (letters), and not lit when it is in numeric mode (numbers). The lamp intensity can be adjusted from the computer.

100

312401/B

Getting started

2 / abc

The result of pushing this button depends on which mode the panel is in, numeric or alphanumeric mode. (The same applies for the following buttons: 3/def, 4/ghi, 5/jkl, 6/mno, 7/pqr, 8/tuv, 9/wxyz.) The number, 2, is entered if the button is pushed when the numeric mode is chosen. When alphanumeric mode is selected, the letter, a, will be entered by pushing one time at the button. Pushing two times, the letter, b, is entered. Three pushes enters the letter, c.
PAGE UP

This button is used to scroll up in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history).
PAGE DOWN

This button is used to scroll down in list view pictures (for instance in Alarm history).
ESCAPE

The ESC button is used the same way as an ESC button on a standard keyboard. Most common use is to exit/cancel/stop. For example use the escape button to exit from Tagdetails and return to the alarm history list.
BACKSPACE

This button moves the cursor one position backward and deletes this preceding character. (Same function as on a standard keyboard)
ENTER

This button is used the same way as the enter button on a standard keyboard. For example use the enter button to confirm a new entered value instead of clicking on the OK softbutton.

5.5.3 Trackball
There are a total of seven buttons around the trackball . Three of these buttons are the mouse buttons in front. The other four are located on each side of the trackball .
Trackball

This is used for navigation on the screen.
Mouse buttons

Same function as an ordinary PC-mouse.
Arrow buttons

On each side of the trackball are the arrow buttons. They work like the arrow buttons on a standard alphanumeric keyboard.

312401/B

101

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

5.5.4 Background light
The background light is integrated in the panel film and has yellow colour. The background light intensity can be adjusted from the computer via USB, and the function is implemented in the module using PWM.

5.5.5 Temperature sensor
A temperature sensor is provided within the module to monitor the operation temperature. If the temperature rises above a specified and configured limit, a system alarm is given.

102

312401/B

Getting started

5.6 Using the Midi Operator Station
5.6.1 Range of use
The Midi Operator Station (MOS) is a specially designed Operator Station that provides easy access to operator functions. It is used as a local or main Operator Station in K-Chief 500 systems and as the bridge display for Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems.
Note

The display examples shown in this manual are not always an exact copy of what you will see on the screen, as the presentation depends on your system configuration and choices of set-up.

5.6.2 Understanding the keyboard
Some of the key functions are general and can be applied at any time. Other key functions are related to certain menus and can only be applied when the appropriate menu is open. Figure 45 MOS keyboard layout

312401/B

103

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

Escape

Removes menus. Goes back to the previous picture in up to five steps by pushing repeatedly.
Menu

Turns menus on. The menu displayed will vary with the operational context.
Enter

Go to sub-menu or display. Confirms insertion and editing of data. Gives access to set-up displays.
Page up

Moves the displayed information up a page in the selected group. Used to increase in some displays.
Page down

Moves the displayed information down a page in the selected group. Used to decrease in some displays.
Sound off

Push to turn audible alarms off.
Alarm acknowledge

Push to acknowledge the displayed alarm.
Four-way navigator key

Moves a square cursor up/down to select text in data displays. Moves a square cursor left/right/up/down and to select objects in mimic pictures.
Alphanumeric keys (0–9)

Used for insertion of letters and numbers. Push the button repeatedly until the desired letter or number is displayed.
Special characters key

Key to insert the following special characters (. - _). Push the button repeatedly until the desired character is displayed.
Function keys (F1–F4)

The function is specified by the text next to the key (left side). Function keys have a one minute time-out to avoid accidental input. Push the Page up or Page down keys to active the functions keys again. Figure 46 Function keys (right) and function (left)

104

312401/B

Getting started

5.6.3 Understanding the display
The Midi Operator Station includes a bright colour flat panel display. The operator interacts with the display through the keyboard. • Window title – Contains the title of the information currently displayed in the main window. • Menu window – Displays the various menus available. • Scroll bar – Indicates how much of the total information in this window is displayed (similar to scroll bars used in standard Windows applications). Use page up and page down or the top and bottom of the navigator key. • Alarm window – Displays the last alarm independent of the information displayed in the main window. Figure 47 Display layout example

312401/B

105

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

Figure 48

Display layout example including graphics

5.6.4 Menus
The following menus are available: Main Menu 1 Alarm Menu 2 Tag Selection Menu 3 User Access 4 Configuration Menu 5 Keyboard/Screen The amount of options in the Main Menu vary according to how the User Access settings are sat. Alarm Menu 1 Alarm History 2 Alarm Summary 3 Alarm Group Display 4 Offscan Display Tag Selection Menu 1 Control Menu 2 PMS Menu 3 All tags

106

312401/B

312401/B 107 . which has a 4 row by 40 characters display.Getting started User Access Level Active level Commissioning SuperUser User Monitoring Change Password Configuration Menu 1 Self check 2 Palette Display 3 Clock 4 Favourite Mimics Keyboard and Screen Colour Palette Keyboard Click Key Timeout Keyboard Light Screen Brightness Day ON Disabled OFF OFF ON OFF 5.1 Explanation of controls and indicators Two different types of Watch Bridge Units are available: • The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type.7 Using the Watch Bridge Unit 5. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types. which has nineteen alarm groups.7. • The LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. and seven alarm groups.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 49 Watch Bridge Unit. LCD type 108 312401/B .

• The LCD type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY. 312401/B 109 .2 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 1 2 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST . LED type The main difference between the two types is that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages. then SELECT and use the arrow buttons. • The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.7. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.Getting started Figure 50 Watch Bridge Unit. 5. whilst the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. • For the LED type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY.

5.1 Explanation of controls and indicators Two different types of Watch Cabin Units are available: • The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) type.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 51 Illumination adjustment 5. • If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent. 5.8.7. which has seventeen alarm groups.3 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 1 2 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons. • The LED (Light Emitting Diode) type.8 Using the Watch Cabin Unit 5. 110 312401/B .4 How to test the panel 1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds. The following illustrations describes the main functionality of the two types.7. replace the panel. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons. which has a 4 row by 40 characters display and six alarm groups. There are no field serviceable parts inside the panel.

LCD type 312401/B 111 .Getting started Figure 52 Watch Cabin Unit.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 53 Watch Cabin Unit. LED type The main difference between the two types is that the LCD type can display individual alarm messages. Do the following: 1 2 3 4 Push SOUND OFF . 112 312401/B . • For the LED type all indicators will be dark when no-one is ON DUTY. Check that the alarm is no longer displayed when the alarm situation no longer exist.2 How to respond to alarms When an alarm condition occur the buzzer will sound and the alarm is indicated on the Watch Cabin Unit. whilst the LED type has a larger number of alarm groups. Take appropriate action. Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator. 5. • The repeat alarm function is activated if an alarm is not acknowledged within a set period of time.8. • The LCD type will display date and time when no-one is ON DUTY.

5.Getting started 5.8. 312401/B 113 . Figure 54 Illumination adjustment 5. • If the LEDs remain dark or the buzzer is silent.8. then SELECT and use the arrow buttons. There are no field serviceable parts inside the panel.4 How to adjust illumination for LED type panels 1 2 Background lighting: Use the arrow buttons. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons. Front lighting: Push LAMP TEST and use the arrow buttons.5 How to test the panel 1 Push LAMP TEST to check that the LEDs illuminate and the buzzer sounds.3 How to adjust illumination for LCD type panels 1 2 Background lighting: Push LAMP TEST .8. replace the panel.

1 Overview This chapter contains detailed descriptions of how to operate the K-Chief 500 Alarm and Monitoring System using the different Operator Stations and panels. ALARM AND MONITORING SYSTEM 6. It is intended for users already familiar with the “Getting Started” section of this manual.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. The following subjects are covered: OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP) on page 115 OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) on page 180 MOS operational procedures on page 242 Watch Calling system operational procedures on page 252 ShipViewer operational procedures on page 255 ME monitoring operational procedures on page 263 114 312401/B .

• The alarm is displayed in red on the screen. the Alarm Navigator and the Graphic Display Navigator. • External alarm devices.2 Navigator name definitions The Navigator is the image which is shown on the Operator Station when the home-button on the Control Room Panel is pushed.1 How to handle alarm events When a process parameter enters an alarm state.Operational procedures. This is illustrated 312401/B 115 . the following takes place: • The alarm text with time. • The alarm is indicated in red in the lower right corner of the colour graphics display.2. 4 Attend to the alarm situation. Do the following to handle an alarm: 1 Push the SOUND OFF button on the Control Room Panel (CRP). The Navigator image is divided in 2 parts. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. It is similar to the image on the Touch Control Panel (TCP). • This turns off the external alarm devices and the buzzer. date and identification is printed. 3 Push the ACK button. such as engine room horn and rotating light. • This changes the alarm text from red to yellow. Note The last four unacknowledged alarms are always displayed on the lower right side of the colour graphics display. Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. • The buzzer in the Control Room Panel is activated.2 OS operational procedures using the Control Room Panel (CRP) 6. 2 Push the ALARM VIEW button. called the Alarm window. • The alarm indicator on the Control Room Panel starts flashing. 6. are activated.2.

Figure 55 Navigator name definitions 6. For more information on the Navigator.2. Navigator name definitions on page 116.or an alarm summary/alarm history display is active. see Navigator on page 86 and Understanding the TCP on page 95. This time stamping is very accurate. Loss of power to Operator Stations The Distributed Processing Units store all the alarm information. the system will continue to operate When power is restored to the Operator Stations. all alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected. Each Distributed Processing Unit timestamps its own alarms immediately when they occur. 6.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 in figure. 116 312401/B . an alarm group. If the Operator Stations loose power.4 How to acknowledge alarms Separate and group alarms can be acknowledged while a mimic-. Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. The system will maintain power for 30 minutes after a blackout.3 How alarms are printed after a black-out Loss of ships power The Distributed Processing Units (24 Volt DC) and the Operator Stations (230 Volt AC) are supported by separate uninterruptible power supplies. All alarms are sorted and printed out according to the time they were detected.2.

5 How to display Alarm Summary The alarm summary image shows all active and acknowledged alarms. 6. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. Result of pushing the ACK button when another image which is not mentioned above is open: • There are no changes on the main colour graphics display image. The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. If there are more unacknowledged alarms in the group push the PAGE DOWN button. And when the alarm condition returns to normal. the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. Alarm Summary on page 118 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm summary image. Alarm and Monitoring System It is one way to acknowledge alarms. but the result on the screen of the Operator Station will be different depending on which image is displayed at the time the ACK button is pushed. called the Alarm window. or use the scrolling function on the right side of the screen. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. Result of pushing the ACK button when an alarmgroup image is open: Two things happens simultaneously: • All active alarms shown on the colour graphics display are acknowledged.2. called the . The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. 312401/B 117 . The three first alarm text lines disappears when the ACK button is pushed. Push the ACK button to acknowledge the additional alarms. • At the lower right corner of the colour graphics display. The red alarm text disappear. the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. The alarm text turns yellow. are acknowledged at the same time. Push the ACK button. called the .Operational procedures. the four last alarms are displayed in red colour. Result of pushing the ACK button when the alarm history image or the alarm summary image is open: Two things happens simultaneously: • A maximum of three alarms. on the colour graphics display. the text becomes green.

• This button opens the Navigator image. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. point.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 56 Alarm Summary Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM SUMMARY. 3 4 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. It is possible to open the alarm summary in two ways: Method 1: 1 Push the HOME button. 118 312401/B . and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. 2 Use the trackball . • A summary of all active and acknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list.

2.Operational procedures. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list. The newest alarms are displayed on top. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used.6 How to display alarm history The alarm history image shows all alarm events chronological. Figure 57 Alarm History Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to display alarm history: 312401/B 119 . Alarm History on page 119 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm history image. 6. Alarm and Monitoring System Method 2: 1 Push the Alarm view button. 2 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.

It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Push the HOME button.7 How to display alarm group information This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. Use the trackball . Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. 120 312401/B . 4 For more details on one tag. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list. 2 3 The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM HISTORY. Do the following: 1 Push the HOME button. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm history list can also be used. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used. 3 4 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.2. 6. • This button opens the Navigator image. • This button opens the Navigator image. 2 Use the trackball . point. and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. • A complete chronological list of all alarm events are displayed on the colour graphics display. double click on the line with the wanted tag.

2 Use the trackball . The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. The total accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. and click Yes to confirm. • A dialogue box like the one underneath is displayed. Do the following: 1 Push the HOME button. main engine.9 How to display offscan alarms This function is used to view tags which are sat to offscan. • This button opens the Navigator image. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 3 5 Type in the wanted value.8 How to display counters and reset counters This function is used to view running hours for pumps. and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW.Operational procedures. 2 Use the trackball . point. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. point and click with the left button on the main group called: LIST VIEW. • The system counters are now displayed. Click on the digit. 6. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. 312401/B 121 . Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: COUNTER DISPLAY. • This button opens the Navigator image. • The counter and lap counter value can be changed by using the trackball and the numeric keys. Do the following: 1 Push the HOME button.2. accumulated values for analogue sensors etc.2. 4 Use the trackball and navigate to the counter or lap counter you want to change.

122 312401/B . 2 3 The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen.2. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used. dusk or night viewing conditions When the Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar place.11 How to set day. • This button opens the Navigator image. 4 Right click on the grey box. dusk or night viewing. point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. Right click anywhere on the screen.2. 4 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. 6.10 How to toggle between group and alarm display Do the following: 1 Push the HOME button. • A grey box with the text “Toggle Alarm and group Display” will appear.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: OFFSCAN TAGS • Offscan tags are displayed. 6. Use the trackball . and the Group Display will be changed to Alarm Display. it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day.

Just set the wanted monitor palette. 312401/B 123 . • This button opens the Navigator image. click on the OK softbutton. like the one underneath. 1 2 Click on the option button beside the wanted palette. Lamp intensity Function This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Control Room Panel (CRP). and then use the following functions to adjust the light intensity on the panels. 2 Use the trackball . 3 Monitor Dimmer Functions The monitor can be adjusted to day palette. point. ALC and TCP. Alarm and Monitoring System 1 Push the HOME button. The change is visible at once. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. INP.Operational procedures. dawn palette and night palette. without changing the palette adjustment on the monitor. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. will appear. To close the window. It is possible to make changes on the light intensity of the CRP.

and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. Touch Display intensity This function is used to adjust the light intensity of the TCP. like the one underneath. 2 To close the window. 3 124 312401/B . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.2. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. 6. and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window. will appear. 2 To close the window. click on the OK softbutton. and the time delay before the screen saver is turned on can be adjusted. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. • 100 % will give the brightest light. 1 Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box. click on the OK softbutton. Backlight intensity This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Input Panel (INP) and the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. point. 2 Use the trackball . click on the OK softbutton.12 Screen Saver On the Operator Station the screen saver can be turned on/off. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. • 7 will give the brightest light. 2 To close the window. and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. 1 Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box. 1 Push the HOME button. • 100 % will give the brightest light.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Click on the drop-down combo box. • This button opens the Navigator image.

• A window. 1 At the lower. Alarm and Monitoring System 4 5 6 Click on the check box which activates the Screen Saver function. Use the trackball . will appear.Operational procedures. like the one underneath. and click with the left button on this icon. left part of the screen is a icon illustrating a floppy disk. click on the OK softbutton. point. 312401/B 125 .13 How to save screen dump The K-Chief 500 has a screen dump function which makes it possible to save the image on the screen. Type in the number of minutes the screen shall be active before the screen saver turns it self on. 6.2. Follow the description in this chapter to make a screen dump. To close the window. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner.

like the one underneath..Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2 Click on the save softbutton if the suggested file name is agreeable. • A window. 1 Push the HOME button. will appear. point.2. use the alphanumeric mode on the CRP and write in the wanted file name before clicking on the save softbutton. 6. • This button opens the Navigator image. and click with the left button on the sofftbutton: MENY.14 How to customise the Favourites The main group called Favourites can be customised by the operator. There can be up to 9 thumbnails in this group. 2 Use the trackball . If not. • The screen dump is now saved. 3 Click on the text : Clear HISTORY. 126 312401/B .

5 6 This time. Click once more on the MENY softbutton. See the list of logs underneath.2.15 How to print Miscellaneous Logs An Operator Station can only be connected to one printer. • The operator’s favourite thumbnails are now saved in the main group. (Choose a maximum of 9 thumbnails. the printer will serve both functions. like the one in item 2. 6. are displayed. • The same window. If it is only one printer in the system. either as an alarm printer or a log printer. The Miscellaneous Logs consists of 11 standard logs and 6 logs which can be chosen. will appear. Note A Selected Points log can only be printed from the Operator Station fitted to do so. List of the Miscellaneous Logs • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Alarm Summary Log (standard) Alarm History Log (standard) Offscan tags Log (standard) Inhibited tags Log (standard) Alarm Log (standard) Group Log (standard) Selected points Log (standard) Autolog (standard) Noonlog (standard) Complete Log (standard) Event Log (standard) Counters Log (option) Tank Log (option) Level & Draft Correction Log (option) API Log (option) 312401/B 127 . This printer will have a defined function. Favorites. click on the text Copy HISTORY to FAVORITES. Favorites.Operational procedures.) The first you click on will be located at the lower right corner of the Navigator when the main group. Alarm and Monitoring System 4 Choose your favourite thumbnails just by clicking once on them.

Tank Log. See How to configure the Autolog on page 135. Alarm History Log and Group Log has some minor differences in the procedure. Auto log and Noon log which needs to be configurated before printing. Alarm log. The printing procedure for the Event Log. Note The tags in Autolog and Noonlog must be configured before they can be printed. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. Complete log. • This button opens the Navigator image. Ullage Log and Custom Log 1 Push the HOME button. point. Counters log. Inhibited tags log.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Ullage Log (option) • Custom Log (option) Most of the logs in the list above can be printed by following the procedure underneath. See How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 133. Except from the Selected Points log. 2 Use the trackball . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. How to print: Alarm Summary Log . Level & Draft Correction Log. API Log. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS 3 • A window similar to the one underneath appears. the Selected Points groups must be configured with the wanted tags. and How to configure the Noonlog on page 136. 128 312401/B . Note To configure an Event Log before printing see How to configure the Event Log on page 132. Note Before printing a Selected Points Log.

point. • This button opens the Navigator image. point. and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. (For example. Event Log and Group Log 1 Push the HOME button. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS 3 • A window similar to the one underneath appears. 2 Use the trackball . • The printing of the chosen log will start. the Alarm Summary Log) Use the trackball . point. and click with the left button on the log you want to print. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete.Operational procedures. 312401/B 129 . and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. 5 How to print: Alarm History Log. Alarm and Monitoring System 4 Use the trackball .

and click with the left button on the log you want to print. Event Log on page 131 and Group Log on page 131 for an illustration of which window is opened for the three different logs. Figure 58 Alarm History Log 130 312401/B . the Alarm History Log) See Alarm History Log on page 130. (For example.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 4 Use the trackball . point.

Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 59 Event Log Figure 60 Group Log 312401/B 131 .Operational procedures.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 For the Alarm History Log and the Event Log choose to print the whole log or select a time span. 6 Note Printing a Selected Points log on demand. 3 Fill inn the password. will clear the interval set for printing of Selected Points log. And click on the OK softbutton. the Event Log will only display certain events like: an operator action changing the process parameters or a change in state of the process. 1 Open Tag details. • The printing of the chosen log will start. You can choose between On and Off.16 How to configure the Event Log The Event Log may be printed out or displayed on the screen. and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice. and Tag details will be opened. And click OK. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete. 132 312401/B . point. point.2. If they are not. • A window appears with a request for a password. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Event Log. this tag will be printed. Double click on the wanted tag. and click on the line which says Eventlog. Use the trackball . See Where to find the Event Log display on page 137 for more information. 4 5 Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text. For the Group Log select the wanted group. point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball . By selecting On. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. 6. • Another window will be shown. Tags must be configured in Tag details to be displayed and/or printed in the Event Log. 2 Use the trackball .

point and click on one of the option buttons. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. • This button opens the Navigator image.17 How to configure your own Selected Points group The system allows you to create up to 5 Selected Points groups. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. The tags can be combined from different alarm groups.Operational procedures. 2 Use the trackball . use the trackball . 312401/B 133 . POINTS DISP 3 • A window similar to the one shown here will appear. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Each group can include up to 20 selected tags. point.2. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown. 4 To choose a group to configure tags in. Do the following: 1 Push the HOME button.

• The selected tag will then be shown on the left side.2. • Do the same procedure again to configure the other Selected Points groups. and click on one of the option buttons. POINTS DISP 3 • A window similar to the one shown here will appear. 1 Push the HOME button. 7 When you have selected all the wanted tags. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. 6 Select the wanted tags by clicking on the tag. right side of the window. • A list of the tags in the chosen group will appear. point. 4 Choose the group you want to make changes in by using the trackball .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 Select group by using the drop-down combo box at the upper. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. 134 312401/B . The tag can also be selected by just double clicking on the tag. 2 Use the trackball . • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown. and then click on the softbutton. click OK. Just remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per group. point.Add.18 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group The list of selected tags can be modified at any time. 6. • This button opens the Navigator image. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

2 Use the trackball . • A window appears with a request for a password. 312401/B 135 . Remove.19 How to configure the Autolog 1 Open Tag details. and Tag details will be opened. point. and click on the softbutton. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball .2. click OK. from point 5 to 7. • If tags in the other Selected Points groups shall be changed. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Click on the tag you want to remove. Alarm and Monitoring System 5 The tags which are in the Selected Points group will be shown on the left side. 6. • To add a tag. Double click on the wanted tag. see How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 133.Operational procedures. point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. and click on the line which says Auto Log. do this same procedure again . 6 When you have renewed all the wanted tags in the Selected Points group.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

3

Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Autolog.

4 5

Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text. Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.

6.2.20 How to configure the Noonlog
1 Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the trackball , point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. Double click on the wanted tag, and Tag details will be opened. 2 Use the trackball , point, and click on the line which says Noon Log. • A window appears with a request for a password. 3 Fill inn the password. And click on the OK softbutton. • Another window will be shown. You can choose between On and Off. By selecting On, this tag will be printed. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Noonlog.

4 5

Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text. Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice.

136

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

6.2.21 Where to find the Event Log display
1 Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image. 2 Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called:
EVENTLOG

3

• The events are displayed in form of a list.

6.2.22 How to display system information
This function is used to display various type of system information such as ship and station information, software version, functions, limited access override etc. It also allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters. 1 Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image. 2 Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY

3

• A window, like the one underneath, will appear.

312401/B

137

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

6.2.23 Access control system
The Limited Access Override softbutton-group is an access control system based on the use of passwords. The system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. The Limited Access Override softbutton-group consists of : Acknowledge, Mimics, Commissioning, Superuser and Password.
Note

Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions.
Acknowledge

This function is used to allow alarms to be received and acknowledged on Operator Stations that normally would not receive them. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. To activate and deactivate this function, do the following:

138

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

1

Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image.

2

Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY

3

• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4 To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Acknowledge.

5

Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Acknowledge, will now say Acknowledge off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Acknowledge off softbutton.

312401/B

139

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

Note

When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton
Acknowledge off

Mimic

This function allows system control through the mimic pictures. It is used to control (start, stop, open, close, etc.) components you normally do not have access to. 1 Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image. 2 Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY

3

• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4 To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Mimics.

140

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

5

Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. And click on the OK softbutton. • The Softbutton which said Mimics, will now say Mimics off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed, just click on the Mimics off softbutton.

Note

When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes, the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again, just use the trackball , point, and click on the softbutton Mimics off.

Commissioning

This function allows changing of alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits, tag description, alarm groups, enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. 1 Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image. 2 Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY

3

• The System Information Display window will now be opened.

312401/B

141

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

4

To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Commissioning.

5

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Commissioning, will now say Commissioning off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE COM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Commissioning off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note

Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.

Superuser

This function makes it possible to change alarm limits, alarm delays, event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. 1 Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image. 2 Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

142

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

3

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM
INFO DISPLAY

• The System Information Display window will now be opened. 4 To activate the function, use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Superuser.

5

Fill in the password, and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Superuser, will now say Superuser off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE SUP is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past, the override function will be turned off.

6

If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed, just click on the Superuser off softbutton. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details.

Note

Access automatically expires after 30 minutes.

312401/B

143

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY 3 • The System Information Display window will now be opened. and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. 5 Fill in the password. and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Password. • This button opens the Navigator image. Note Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. 6 If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details. use the trackball . will now say Password off. point. 2 Use the trackball . • When the 30 minutes has past. 4 To activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Password. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. point. just click on the Password off softbutton. and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. the override function will be turned off. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE KEY is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. 144 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Password 1 Push the HOME button.

2 3 6. Click on the Unit Display softbutton. 312401/B 145 . Do the following: 1 Open the SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY. is a box with the text. The procedure can be found in How to display system information on page 137. or push the enter button. Set. Fill in the number of the wanted Distributed Processing Unit in this box. 1 Push the HOME button.2. • This button opens the Navigator image.2. At the upper right side on the System Information Display window. 2 Use the trackball . and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. beside it.25 How to change time zone This function is used to change time zone when sailing eastwards or westwards. 3 4 Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM Click on the softbutton called. • The information on the selected Distributed Processing Unit will now be shown.Operational procedures. alarm status.24 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information This procedure display all parameters for each tag such as values. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. under the text Timezone. point. Unit Display. alarm limits etc. • A window appears with a request for a password. INFO DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

• A window appears with a request for a password. and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here. 146 312401/B . And click OK. Click OK. all time changes must be made in the master clock. point. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 1 Push the HOME button. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 Fill in the password.2. 6. • This button opens the Navigator image. INFO DISPLAY. 3 4 Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM Click on the softbutton called: Set System Time. 6 7 Choose the time zone by using the drop-down combo box. Note If the system is fitted with a master clock. and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE.26 How to change system time Note Use the “change time zone” function above when going between different time zones. 2 Use the trackball . The K-Chief 500 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT).

• The new date and time is transferred to the other Operator Stations in the network if the Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data. See Mimic on page 140 for more details.27 Info field This function is only for use by Kongsberg Maritime. 6. 6. 312401/B 147 .28 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Operator Stations which would not normally allow it. See Acknowledge on page 138 for more details.2.2. Note If the system is fitted with a master clock. all time changes must be made in the master clock.29 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Operator Stations which normally would not allow it. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear.2. And click OK. 6. 6 Use the drop-down combo boxes and select date and time. Then click on the OK softbutton. Alarm and Monitoring System 5 Fill in the password.Operational procedures.

the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will disappear. 4 Click on the softbutton called: Disable CRP buzzer. • The text on the softbutton changes to Disable OCP buzzer.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6. • In the upper part of the screen. Click on the OK softbutton. the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed. and click with the left button on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. • This button opens the Navigator image. • A window appears with a request for a password. 2 Use the trackball . To activate the buzzer again.31 How to change tag parameters for a channel This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. Do the following: 148 312401/B . Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY 3 • The System Information Display window will now be opened. • The CRP buzzer is now disabled. do the following: 1 2 Open the System Information Display if it is not already open. Use the trackball . in the status area. in the status area. point. • In the upper part of the screen.2.30 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer 1 Push the HOME button. 5 6 Fill in the password. • The text on the softbutton changes to Enable OCP buzzer. 6. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.2. point. and click with the left button on the Enable OCP buzzer softbutton • The CRP buzzer is now active.

point and click on the wanted alarmgroup. • The display picture is updated. Tag Details image on page 149 gives an illustration of a Tag Details image. • The parameter can now be changed to the wanted value. Fill in the password and click on the Ok softbutton. 3 Double click on the line with the wanted tag. Alarm and Monitoring System 1 Push the HOME button.Operational procedures. • Tag Details for that tag will be displayed. and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Operator Station in the system. • This button opens the Navigator image. Use the trackball . 4 5 6 Double click on the parameter you want to change. 2 The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the screen. A window appears with a request for a password. Figure 61 Tag Details image 312401/B 149 .

Offscan Value. stops checking this tag against alarm limits. The following information is displayed by clicking on them: Tag Details Shows the normal tag details display. It is Tag Details. Tag Application Lists other tags related to this tag. Offscan Enable. Clicking on the softbutton. starts checking this tag against alarm limits. allows you to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. Advanced Tag Details Shows a full list of all tag details. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of displayed parameters. Offscan Disable. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Clicking on the softbutton. Clicking on the softbutton. The following two tables explains what the different parameters for analogue and digital input tags are used for: Analogue input channel parameters Parameter name Tag name Tag number Description Function Value Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel type Type Text Number Text Text Number Number Number Number Adjustable No No Yes No No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled Analog/Digital All tags in the system are divided into different groups All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups Type Control Room Panel alarm group Bridge group Text Number Number No Yes Yes 150 312401/B . Advanced Tag Details and Tag Application.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 There are three softbuttons on the bottom of the tag details window. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password.

Operational procedures. Units Low Eng. Alarm and Monitoring System Parameter name Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Offscan value Inhibited by tag Access group Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Dynamic Dead Band Counts Low Counts High Eng. to acknowledge this alarm Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instrument maximum value High/Low delay in 1 second High/Low delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Digital input channel parameters Parameter name Tag name Description Function State Type Text Text Text Text Adjustable No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Input status after time delay 312401/B 151 . Units High Alarm On-Delay1 Alarm Off-Delay1 Alarm On-Delay2 Alarm Off-Delay1 Inhibit On-Delay Inhibit Off-Delay Type Number Number Number Number Number Text Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id.

For instance used for main engine exhaust gas temperature. This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking. to acknowledge this alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Refer to another Tag or Channel Delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Invert input status Type Control Room Panel alarm group Bridge group Text Number Number No Yes Yes Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Inhibited by tag Access group Enable Event on Open Enable Event on Closed Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay Al.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Parameter name Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel type Type Number Number Number Adjustable No No No Function Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled Analog/Digital All tags in the system are divided into different groups All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id.32 How to change Deviation parameters How to change limits.2. and deviation from the corrected value. 152 312401/B .Inhibit Src TagNo Alarm On Delay Alarm Off Delay On Delay Off Delay Invert input Number Number Number Number Text Number Yes/No Yes/No Number Number Text Number Number Number Number Yes/No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6.

• A window is opened.Operational procedures. 312401/B 153 . Click Ok. point. Figure 62 A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display 4 Click on the limit you want to change. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. 5 6 Type in the new wanted value. 2 Use the trackball . Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C 3 • The new image on the screen will look like the figure underneath. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Alarm and Monitoring System 1 Push the HOME button. • This button opens the Navigator image. A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display on page 153.

point. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C 3 4 5 Click on the text which says: AUTO. • This button opens the Navigator image. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION PARAM C 3 154 312401/B . 2 Use the trackball . and Current deviation should read 0 for all cylinders. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder. • All values found for Current deviation are moved to Correction. Automatic correction 1 Push the HOME button. 2 Use the trackball . Note When the average temperature is below a preset value. It can be found on the right side of the text. How to make profile The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. • This button opens the Navigator image. Manual correction 1 Push the HOME button. the deviation alarm is blocked. Push the enter button.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Use this procedure to change any value on this display. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Profile correction. to get the same temperature in all cylinders as reference. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. automatic correction and manual correction. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways. point.

2 Use the trackball . and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY.2. and click with the left button on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO.33 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration Do the following procedure to get access to the Watch Calling Configuration: 1 Push the HOME button. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. point.Operational procedures. 312401/B 155 . and click to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: WATCHCALLING CONFIG. Profile correction. 3 6. 1 Push the HOME button. Alarm and Monitoring System 4 5 Click on the text which says: MAN.2. 2 Use the trackball .) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • This button opens the Navigator image. • For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to chapter Exhaust mean value tag items on page 397. the system must be in control watch. point. • The value for each cylinder under Current deviation should read 0. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.34 How to set the On Duty engineer Note In order to set On duty engineer. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. • This button opens the Navigator image. Use the trackball . point. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. 6. It can be found on the right side of the text.

3 Click on the softbutton for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH).) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. a text with who is on duty is displayed. the . 2 Use the trackball . and click on the thumbnail which says. 156 312401/B . • A indicator beside the officers title on the Watch Calling Units are lit.2.35 How to select the Watch Responsible location Note This procedure requires that an engineer is sat to on duty.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 If for example the 2nd engineer shall be sat on duty. • When the watch responsibility has been accepted. Refer to chapter How to set the On Duty engineer on page 155. • Down in the left corner of the OS screen. Use the following procedure to change Watch Responsible location. • This button opens the Navigator image. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. use the trackball . the status will be shown at the function window on the Operator Station. 2ND ENG ON DUTY. 6. 4 To take the officer off duty again. point. The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. This can be done in the following ways: On the Operator Station: 1 Push the HOME button. click on the same thumbnail again. and click with the left button on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. point.

(To illustrate this procedure the WCALL ENGINE main group is used as an example.Operational procedures. • The indicator for the new location will flash and make a sound until it is accepted at that location. Which officer and/or engineer you can call depends on the system configuration.2. • This button opens the Navigator image. The calling can be done by the following methods: Using the Operator Station: The softbuttons depends on the system configuration. 6. point and click on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO.) • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups.36 How to call officers From the Operator Station you can call the different officers and engineers. The indicator for the previous location will be switched off (no longer lit). Alarm and Monitoring System On the Watch Bridge Unit: 1 Push the button for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH buttons). (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them. 312401/B 157 .) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 1 Push the HOME button. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 2 Use the trackball . • The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. The image underneath is an illustration of how it may look like.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Click on one of the thumbnail which says CALL DUTY ENG or CALL ALL ENG (depending on who you want to call). 1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG button or the CALL ALL ENG button on the Watch Bridge Unit (depending on who you want to call). push the same button again. 2 To cancel the call. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. 158 312401/B . • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button. • The call indicator will be lit. just click on the same thumbnail again. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button. 4 To cancel the call. On the Watch Bridge Unit: The buttons depends on the system configuration.

the Watch Bridge unit and Watch Cabin units are set to On Duty mode. • The new qualification has now been set. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. When an engineer is Off Duty his or her’s panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive.2. Click on the qualification text beside the officer who are being replaced.38 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode When an engineer/officer or a group of engineers/officers are on duty. Click on the OK softbutton. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted qualification. the qualifications table needs to be updated. • A similar window opens: 4 5 The different qualifications equals a number.2. (The following example shows a qualification change for the Chief engineer:) 1 2 3 To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter on page .37 How to change the engineer qualifications When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced. 6. And the text has changed to the selected qualification. What is Off Duty active The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display the alarm information. What is Off Duty passive 312401/B 159 . Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP. and page 2 will appear.Operational procedures.

(In this example.39 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as “belonging” to that engineer-position. 1 is active and 0 is passive. Pushing the buttons on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. and page 2 will appear. 5 6. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark).Kongsberg K-Chief 500 The panels will not sound an alarm. the Chief engineer is being replaced. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP. These are the panels in his’ or her’s cabin and in public areas. Click on the mode text beside the officer it concern. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted mode. 160 312401/B . And the text has changed. 1 2 3 To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter on page . Click on the OK softbutton. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. Note This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station.2.) • A similar window opens: 4 The different modes equals a number. When an engineer is On duty. • The new mode has now been sat. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system.

Click on the officer whose panel is being assigned to someone else. (In this example. and click on the softbutton called:Watchcalling Configuration. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY 3 4 5 Use the trackball . point. point. The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. there is a definition of the groups. • This button opens the Navigator image. The panels can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position. the 3rd engineer’s panel is being assigned to someone else) • A similar window to this is opened: • On the right side of the screen. Alarm and Monitoring System Each panel has a unique serial number. and the public areas. 2 Use the trackball . and click on the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE .Operational procedures. 1 Push the HOME button. all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be activated when the Chief Engineer is on duty. It may look like this: 312401/B 161 . For example.

162 312401/B . You will also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. When the desired tags are selected. A preserve hour facility will save all tag data for a selected hour for later reference. To display the data you can use the trend display. The trend display contains a graph selector panel where you can select between up to 8 different graph views.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6 7 Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted officer to assign the panel to.2. If you select the current hour. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. You can select any tag for plot presentation. you can select an hour in the time-line panel to plot the corresponding data. Each graph view can have up to 8 plots.40 How to make your own short trend display Introduction to short trend The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. Click on the OK softbutton. 6. the system will continue to add changes to the graph upon changes in the tags.

The SELECT TAG DIALOGUE will pop up. • This button opens the Navigator image.Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 63 The short trend display How to make your own short trend display Do the following: 1 2 Push the HOME button at the control panel. point. Right click on one of the empty plot labels and select SELECT TAG in the pop-up menu. Select a tag in the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. Press OK to exit the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SHORT TREND 3 4 5 Select a graph by selecting one of the eight radio buttons in the graph selector panel. 6 7 312401/B 163 . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Use the trackball . If desired. and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. use the filter to reduce the number of tags shown.

Every new hour the labels are shifted one position to the left. the data is retrieved from the logging server instead. In the upper part of the dialogue box is a check box with this text beside it: Automatically select the next plot when a tag is selected.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 8 9 Repeat step 5 to 7 to add more tags. When this function is activated you can directly select the next tag you want to plot in the same diagram. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display on page 228. there is an alternative way of doing this. But with this function activated you just repeat step 6 and click on the OK softbutton to add more tags in the diagram. Left-click. How to select time in the trend display The time-line panel present the last 24 hours with the current hour at the right end. Use the trackball and click in this check box. Observe that the selected hour is marked and that the corresponding data is plotted in the graph. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 175. If an hour is selected. Step 8 in the procedure above says to repeat step 5 to 8. 164 312401/B . Figure 64 The time-line at 16 hours with the 07 hour selected Figure 65 selected The time-line at 16 hours with the current hour Do the following to select an hour: 1 2 3 Position the cursor by using the trackball slightly to the right of the desired hour. If more than one tag shall be selected for plotting. Click on an hour in the time-line panel to plot the data. the corresponding files are read from the hard disk. and the trend is continuously updating additional changes to the tags. If the user selects current hour. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165.

Note that the axis label’s font is changed to BOLD. • The axis labels background colour is changed to black to indicate that the axis is selected for y-axis manipulation. How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display Each plot has its own y-axis. This makes it possible to manipulate them individually to make a more readable graph picture.Operational procedures. 2 Select the axis by clicking on it. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as follows: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • In: Zoom in • Out: Zoom out • Auto: Set the axis to display the complete plot in 95% of the plot area • Set: Manually key in the minimum and maximum values • X: Deselects all selected axes and hide the y-axis control The arrow keys around the trackball can also be used to change the selected y-axis: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • Left: Zoom in • Right: Zoom out 5 Repeat step 1 and 2 on already selected plots to deselect an axis. Do the following to change a plot’s y-axis: 1 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the plot’s y-axis. You can zoom and pan a single plot or several plots at a time. Figure 66 Y-axis zoom and pan control 3 4 Repeat step 1 and 2 to add other axes. Alarm and Monitoring System Note The selected hour can also be changed by using the left and right arrow keys. It is also possible to select all the y-axis: 312401/B 165 . • When one axis or more is selected the y-axis control is displayed in the upper left corner of the plot area.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 2 3 4 5 Click on the MENU softbutton. a tool-tip box will pop-up displaying the point’s time stamp and actual value. by clicking on the text. Figure 67 X-axis zoom and pan control Click the buttons as follows to change the graph’s x-axis: Pan the graph to the left Pan the graph to the right Zoom out Zoom in The selected point in time will be illustrated in the time display to the right. A context menu is opend. by clicking on the text. Select Y-Scale. How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display The graph includes one x-axis for all plots. Use the functions of the x-axis zoom and pan control to zoom and pan the x-axis. When the cursor is positioned over one of the points. 166 312401/B . In the sample below the graph is set to display the time between 10:35 and 10:40 approximately. Figure 68 Time display How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display It is possible to switch on and off a function whereby the plot’s actual position is marked with a small square. Select Select all plots. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as described in the list above.

Right click to open the context menu. Select Points. 3 4 Select View. the plot’s corresponding value is displayed in the plot label. by clicking on the text. 2 Select Show cursor. By positioning the cursor in x horizontally. The cursor will be displayed and the graph label will indicate the cursor’s time position.Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 69 Plot point value Do the following to enable the display of plot points: 1 2 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the menu softbutton. 312401/B 167 . Do the following to switch the cursor on: 1 Right click in the plot area to open the context menu. to enable or disable displaying of plot points. How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor It is possible to switch on and off a cursor in the graph area. A tool-tip with exact time information is also generated.

Click and hold the left button while moving the cursor horizontally. Figure 71 Display of x-axis grid-lines Do the following to enable the display of x grid-lines: 1 2 Position the cursor on the menu softbutton. Release the left button. How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the x-axis on and off. 168 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 70 Cursor’s time position 3 Move the cursor to read values for other points: a b c Move the cursor near the vertical cursor. by using the trackball . Right click to open the context menu. The values are now updated.

How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the y-axis on and off.Operational procedures. 312401/B 169 . Right click to open the context menu. Only grid-lines for one y-axis may be visible simultaneously. Alarm and Monitoring System 3 4 Select View. Figure 72 Display of y-axis grid-lines 1 2 Position the cursor on a plot label. by using the trackball . Select Gridlines X-Axis to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines. The grid-line is connected to the plot’s y-axis and will have the same colour. by clicking on the text.

How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display The plot may be drawn in a digital or interpolated mode. with a colour derived from the plot colour. Right click to open the context menu. Do the following to enable the fill function for a plot: 1 2 Position the cursor on a plot label. by using the trackball . Digital. This mode is best suited for digital values.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 4 Select Show grid lines to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines for the selected plot. The base value is set to zero by default. 3 Select Fill to base to enable or disable the fill function. but it may be changed by selecting the menu item Set base. means that the line is drawn between the points only by use of vertical and horizontal lines. Repeat step 1 to 3 on another plot to enable grid-lines for the selected plot. 170 312401/B . Figure 73 Fill-to-base function The picture above shows the difference between a filled plot and a plot not. How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display A function called Fill-to-base enables the plot to colour the area between a pre-defined value and the plot value.

Right click to open the context menu. This mode is best suited for analogue type of values. Alarm and Monitoring System In the ‘interpolated’ mode. 3 Select Interpolate to enable or disable the interpolation mode. the line is drawn as a straight line between the points assuming that the value has changed gradually rather than jumped to the new value. How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display You can add an annotation to each plot in a graph. 312401/B 171 . Figure 74 Digital and interpolated mode Do the following to switch between the two modes: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want to change. An annotation is a mark that can be positioned on the plot to mark a point of special interest.Operational procedures.

4 Drag and drop the Annotation symbol to the desired position on the graph. The Annotation symbol is shown in the plot label. 3 Select Annotation to enable or disable the annotation. Right click to open the context menu.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 75 Annotation Do the following to add an annotation: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want. How to remove a plot in the trend display Do the following to remove a plot: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want. 172 312401/B . Right click to open the context menu.

How to save an image to the image repository It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. 2 Left click to open the menu. You can view saved snapshots by using the built-in image viewer.Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System 3 Select Remove to remove the plot. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the Meny softbutton. 312401/B 173 . The images in the repository can be viewed by using the built-in image viewer. Do the following to save an image of a graph: 1 Select the graph that you want to save a snapshot of. Do the following to view an image in the image repository: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor between on the Meny softbutton. How to display an image in the image repository It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. 3 Left click to open the menu. 4 Select Save image to make a snapshot of the currently selected graph.

the oldest data set is deleted. Do the following to preserve an hour: 1 Select the hour you want to preserve in the time-line panel. How to preserve an hour in the trend display It is possible to preserve an hour for later reference. MM month. The data is named using the format YYMMDD_HH where YY denominates year. Figure 76 Image Viewer 4 5 To display it. 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. DD day and HH hour. Up to 10 data sets can be preserved. 3 Right click on the Menu softbutton. select a thumbnail in the list view on the left side. This function makes a copy of the stored data for the currently selected hour. 174 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Select Image Viewer to display the Image Viewer. When 10 data sets are stored and the function is executed once more. Select a graph view in the graph selector panel to exit the image viewer.

Operational procedures. Do the following to load a preserved hour: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. Click on the Menu softbutton. 4 Load one of the preserved hours by clicking on it. How to preserve trend display settings manually The trends display settings are normally saved automatically. 312401/B 175 . Right click on the Menu softbutton. If you want to change the settings without saving your changes. • The data for the hour is loaded and displayed. Alarm and Monitoring System 4 Select Preserve hour to preserve the currently selected hour. This will make sure that your plot settings remain the same after a system restart. and save and load the display settings manually. it is possible to switch off the automatic saving. 3 Select Load preserve hour to open the Preserved hours sub-menu. Do the following to switch off the automatic saving: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. How to load an preserved hour in the trend display It is possible to display data from preserved hours instead of the available 24 hours log.

The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. If you want to remove all plots and plot settings in the graph. You can select any of the configured tags for plot presentation.41 How to make your own long trend display Introduction to long trend The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. In addition. the long trend display is used. where you can select between up to eight different graph views.2. ranging from 1 minute (giving 5 days) to 20 minutes (giving 100 days). press Load. The long trend display contains a graph selector panel.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Select Save automatically. it is possible to configure up to 100 tags for long time trending. select Clear all. You may also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. Each graph view can have up to eight plots. 6. To display the data. 176 312401/B . If you want to reload the setting again. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. The logging interval may be set for each tag individually. 4 Select Save.

Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 77 The long trend display How to operate the long trend display The operation of the long trend display is nearly identical to operating the short trend display. Refer to the following issues in the short trend display chapter for further reference: How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display on page 166 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor on page 167 How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 168 How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 169 How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display on page 170 How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display on page 170 How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display on page 171 312401/B 177 .Operational procedures.

and click with the left button on the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. • This button opens the Navigator image. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: LONG TREND 3 4 5 Click on the Menu softbutton. Use the trackball . to open the dialogue box below. 178 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to remove a plot in the trend display on page 172 How to save an image to the image repository on page 173 How to configure a long trend Do the following to configure a long trend 1 2 Push the Home button. point. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Select Long trend setup from the menu.

Click on this button to reload the data. and press Delete. Click Add to add the tag to Configured tags for long trend. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 165. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data. Repeat step 6 and 7 to add more tags. select the tag in the Configured tags for long trend grid. Use filters as desired. To view the updated data you can select Menu→Load.Operational procedures. Please be aware that if this function is activated. Please note that it will take some time before changes to the configuration is visible in the display. Select the Load every hour to activate this function. an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. How to load logged data in the long trend display Every hour new data is added to the log files on disk by the log server. Click in the Sampling interval / duration field to change the logging interval. 10 To remove an entry from logging. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display on page 166. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data. it may interrupt your system at an inconvenient point in time and it may take a few seconds to load the data. If tags are removed all the logged data for all tags below the removed tags will be cleared. Alarm and Monitoring System 6 7 8 9 Find and select a tag in the Available tags panel. It is also possible to get the trend display to automatically load the updated data every 1 hour. 312401/B 179 . an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 175.

but a stylus similar to a fingertip is also a possibility. The Alarm Navigator is on the left side and the Graphic Display Navigator is on the right. 180 312401/B .1 How to lock and unlock the Touch Control Panel The Touch Control Panel can be locked. 6. See illustration.3 OS operational procedures using the Touch Control Panel (TCP) The image on the Touch Control Panel (TCP) is called the Navigator.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6. the only active part of the TCP is the Meny softbutton.and How alarms are printed after a black-out on page 116. When the TCP is locked. like the Navigator image. Navigator name definitions on page 180. To operate the TCP a finger is normally used. please see How to handle alarm events on page 115. Figure 78 Navigator name definitions Note The buttons on the Control Room Panel (CRP) are used to handle alarm events.How to acknowledge alarms on page 116 . for more information. The TCP screen is divided in 2 parts.3.

and on the right side of the thumbnails. It is located under the main groups.Operational procedures. • A message window like the one underneath will appear on the TCP: • The TCP is now locked. • A window similar to the on shown here is displayed: 2 Touch the Lock Touch Control Panel text. Alarm and Monitoring System Lock the TCP: 1 Touch the Meny softbutton on the Touch Control Panel. Unlock the TCP: 1 Touch the Meny softbutton on the Touch Control Panel. and on the right side of the thumbnails. It is located under the main groups. • A message window like the one underneath will appear on the TCP: 312401/B 181 .

Alarm Summary on page 182 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm summary image.2 How to display Alarm Summary The alarm summary image displays all active and acknowledged alarms. 6. Figure 79 Alarm Summary Please see Alarm text colour on page 28 for an overview of the colours used to distinguish between the alarm states. Do the following to display alarm summary: 182 312401/B . • The TCP is now unlocked.3.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2 Touch the Lock Touch Control Panel text.

The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm summary list can also be used. • A summary of all active and unacknowledged alarms are displayed on the colour graphics display. Alarm History on page 183 shows an example of an OS display with an alarm history image. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.3.3 How to display alarm history The alarm history image displays all alarm events chronological. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM SUMMARY.Operational procedures. The newest alarms are displayed on top. 6. Figure 80 Alarm History Do the following to display alarm history: 312401/B 183 . 2 3 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons (on the CRP) to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. Alarm and Monitoring System 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW.

• The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list. Do the following: 1 2 The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP.3. main engine. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm list can also be used.3. Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. 6. The scrolling function on the right side of the alarm history list can also be used. 3 For more details on one tag. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. Do the following: 184 312401/B .5 How to display counters and reset counters This function is used to view running hours for pumps. accumulated values for analogue sensors etc. The total accumulated value and “lap” value for each tag is displayed. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: ALARM HISTORY. 2 3 6.4 How to display alarm group information This function is used to view the tags in an alarm group. double click on the line with the wanted tag. Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The list can be sorted by clicking on the different headlines of the list. The value and alarm limits for each tag is displayed.

4 Type in the wanted value. 6. Do the following: 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW.Operational procedures. 312401/B 185 . Alarm and Monitoring System 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LIST VIEW. Click on the digit. The value and alarm limit for each tag are displayed. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: COUNTER DISPLAY.6 How to display offscan alarms This function is used to view tags which are sat to offscan. 3 Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons to go backwards and forwards in the list when more than one page exists. • A dialogue box like the one underneath is displayed. 2 3 Use the trackball and navigate to the counter or lap counter you want to change. and click Yes to confirm.3. • The system counters are now displayed. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. The scrolling function on the right side can also be used. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: OFFSCAN TAGS 2 • Offscan tags are displayed. • The counter and lap counter value can be changed by using the trackball and the numeric keys.

and the Group Display will be changed to Alarm Display. 3 Right click on the grey box. dusk or night viewing. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window. will appear. dusk or night viewing conditions When the Operator Station is placed on the bridge or in a similar place. like the one underneath. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6. 6. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. 2 186 312401/B . • A grey box with the text “Toggle Alarm and group Display” will appear.8 How to set day.3. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. it is useful to set the viewing conditions for day.3.7 How to toggle between group and alarm display Do the following: 1 2 The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP. Use the trackball and right click anywhere on the screen.

without changing the palette adjustment on the monitor. • 7 will give the brightest light. click on the OK softbutton. and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. ALC and TCP. 312401/B 187 . Touch Display intensity This function is used to adjust the light intensity of the TCP. The change is visible at once.Operational procedures. To close the window. 2 To close the window. Just set the wanted monitor palette. Lamp intensity Function This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Control Room Panel (CRP). It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. and then use the following functions to adjust the light intensity on the panels. 1 Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box. click on the OK softbutton. The TCP is simultaneously adjusted when this function is used. 1 2 Use the trackball and click on the option button beside the wanted palette. dawn palette and night palette. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. Alarm and Monitoring System Monitor Dimmer Functions The monitor can be adjusted to day palette. INP. It is possible to make changes on the light intensity of the CRP.

6. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. Backlight intensity This function is used to adjust the intensity of the light on the Input Panel (INP) and the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). • 100 % will give the brightest light.3. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 2 To close the window.9 Screen saver On Operator Station the screen saver can be turned on/off. like the one underneath. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DIMMER • A window. 2 To close the window.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box. and the time delay before the screen saver is turned on can be adjusted. 1 Use the trackball and click on the drop-down combo box. • 100 % will give the brightest light. 2 188 312401/B . and chose the wanted intensity by clicking on it. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. click on the OK softbutton. click on the OK softbutton. will appear.

10 How to save screen dump The K-Chief 500 has a screen dump function which makes it possible to save the image on the screen. Fill in the number of minutes the screen shall be active before the screen saver turns it self on. and click with the left button on this icon. It can also be closed by clicking on the close softbutton in the upper right corner. Follow the description in this chapter to make a screen dump. like the one underneath. Use the trackball . will appear. use the alphanumeric mode on the CRP and write in the wanted file name before clicking on the save softbutton. If not. point. 6. 312401/B 189 . 1 At the lower.Operational procedures.3. click on the OK softbutton. To close the window. 2 Click on the save softbutton if the suggested file name is agreeable. Alarm and Monitoring System 3 4 5 Use the trackball and click on the check box which activates the Screen Saver function. left part of the screen is a icon illustrating a floppy disk. • A window. • The screen dump is now saved.

. • A window. like the one in item 2. the printer will serve both functions. either as an alarm printer or a log printer. See the list of logs underneath.11 How to customise the Favourites The main group called Favourites can be customised by the operator. are displayed.3. • The same window. 6. Favorites. The Miscellaneous Logs consists of 11 standard logs and 6 logs which can be chosen. Note A Selected Points log can only be printed from the Operator Station fitted to do so. • The operator’s favourite thumbnails are now saved in the main group.) The first you touch will be located at the lower right corner of the Navigator when the main group. List of the Miscellaneous Logs • Alarm Summary Log (standard) 190 312401/B . will appear.3. Choose your favourite thumbnails just by touching once on them. This printer will have a defined function. Touch once more on the MENY softbutton. 4 5 This time. Favorites. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the softbutton called: MENY.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6.12 How to print Miscellaneous Logs An Operator Station can only be connected to one printer. If it is only one printer in the system. There can be up to 9 thumbnails in this group. will appear. touch on the text Copy HISTORY to FAVORITES. (Choose a maximum of 9 thumbnails. 2 3 Touch the text : Clear HISTORY. like the one underneath. on the TCP.

The printing procedure for the Event Log.Operational procedures. Note Before printing a selected Points Log. Note The tags in Autolog and Noonlog must be configured before they can be printed. See How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 196. and How to configure the Noonlog on page 199. Auto log and Noon log which needs to be configurated before printing. 312401/B 191 . Alarm History Log and Group Log has some minor differences in the procedure. Alarm and Monitoring System • Alarm History Log (standard) • Offscan tags Log (standard) • Inhibited tags Log (standard) • Alarm Log (standard) • Group Log (standard) • Selected points Log (standard) • Autolog (standard) • Noonlog (standard) • Complete Log (standard) • Event Log (standard) • Counters Log (option) • Tank Log (option) • Level & Draft Correction Log (option) • API Log (option) • Ullage Log (option) • Custom Log (option) Most of the logs in the list above can be printed by following the procedure underneath. Except from the Selected Points log. Note To configure an Event Log before printing see How to configure the Event Log on page 195. the Selected Points groups must be configured with the wanted tags. See How to configure the Autolog on page 199.

point. Counters log. and click with the left button on the log you want to print.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to print: Alarm Summary Log . It will change back to READY when the printout is complete. Inhibited tags log. Alarm log. and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton. (For example. Ullage Log and Custom Log 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. • The printing of the chosen log will start. Complete log. 4 192 312401/B . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called:MISC LOGS • A window similar to the one underneath appears. point. Tank Log. the Alarm Summary Log) Use the trackball . • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. Level & Draft Correction Log. 2 3 Use the trackball . API Log.

point. Alarm and Monitoring System How to print: Alarm History Log. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Event Log and Group Log 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. 312401/B 193 . 3 Use the trackball . (For example. the Alarm History Log) See Alarm History Log on page 195.Operational procedures. Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: MISC LOGS 2 • A window similar to the one underneath appears. Event Log on page 195and Group Log on page 195 for an illustration of which window is opened for the three different logs. and click with the left button on the log you want to print.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 81 Alarm History Log Figure 82 Event Log 194 312401/B .

Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 83 Group Log 4 For the Alarm History Log and the Event Log choose to print the whole log or select a time span.Operational procedures. • The status indication for all the other logs will change to BUSY when a log is printing. the Event Log will only display certain events like: an operator action changing the process parameters or a change in state of the process. For the Group Log select the wanted group. 312401/B 195 . will clear the interval set for printing of Selected Points log. and click with the left button on the PRINT softbutton.3. • The printing of the chosen log will start. Use the trackball . And click OK. It will change back to READY when the printout is complete. 5 Note Printing a Selected Points log on demand. 6. See Where to find the Event Log display on page 200 for more information. Tags must be configured in Tag details to be displayed and/or printed in the Event Log. point.13 How to configure the Event Log The Event Log may be printed out or displayed on the screen. If they are not.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Open Tag details. And click on the OK softbutton. POINTS DISP 2 • A window similar to the one shown here will appear. Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice. and click on the line which says Eventlog. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. • A window appears with a request for a password. Double click on the wanted tag. By selecting On. 2 Use the trackball . and Tag details will be opened. Each group can include up to 20 selected tags. You can choose between On and Off. point. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Do the following: 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. • Another window will be shown. this tag will be printed.14 How to configure your own Selected Points group The system allows you to create up to 5 Selected Points groups. 4 5 Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text. The tags can be combined from different alarm groups. 3 Fill inn the password. 6.3. 196 312401/B . The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Event Log.

Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown. click OK. 6 When you have selected all the wanted tags. • A list of the tags in the chosen group will appear. point and click on one of the option buttons. use the trackball . 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. right side of the window. and then click on the softbutton. 6.Operational procedures. The tag can also be selected by just double clicking on the tag.15 How to change the list of tags in the Selected Points group The list of selected tags can be modified at any time. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Just remember there is a maximum of 20 tags per group.Add. 4 Select group by using the drop-down combo box at the upper. • The selected tag will then be shown on the left side. • Do the same procedure again to configure the other Selected Points groups. 5 Select the wanted tags by clicking on the tag. Alarm and Monitoring System 3 To choose a group to configure tags in.3. POINTS DISP 2 • A window similar to the one shown here will appear. 312401/B 197 .

click OK. and click on one of the option buttons. • If tags in the other Selected Points groups shall be changed. Remove.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Choose the group you want to make changes in by using the trackball . do this same procedure again . 5 When you have renewed all the wanted tags in the Selected Points group. • A similar window to the one underneath will be shown. 198 312401/B . • To add a tag. Click on the tag you want to remove. see How to configure your own Selected Points group on page 196. point. 4 The tags which are in the Selected Points group will be shown on the left side. from point 5 to 7. and click on the softbutton.

Use the CRP and double click on the wanted tag. 2 Use the trackball . 6. 3 Fill inn the password. • Another window will be shown. 312401/B 199 .3. And click on the OK softbutton. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image. and Tag details will be opened. By selecting On. this tag will be printed. Use the CRP and double click on the wanted tag.Operational procedures. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup.17 How to configure the Noonlog 1 Open Tag details. • A window appears with a request for a password. You can choose between On and Off. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. 2 Use the trackball . and click on the line which says Noon Log. point. Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice. and click on the line which says Auto Log. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Autolog. • A window appears with a request for a password. point.16 How to configure the Autolog 1 Open Tag details. • One of the ways this can be done is by using the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the Navigator image.3. and Tag details will be opened. 4 5 Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text.

this tag will be printed.18 Where to find the Event Log display 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. 4 5 Select On by clicking in the option box beside the text. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. software version. 2 6. • Another window will be shown. will appear. And click on the OK softbutton. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 6. functions.3. By selecting On.19 How to display system information This function is used to display various type of system information such as ship and station information. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: LOGS & SERVICE. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SEL. 200 312401/B . like the one underneath. When Off is selected the tag will not be printed in the Noonlog. You can choose between On and Off. Click on the OK softbutton to confirm the choice. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: EVENTLOG • The events are displayed in form of a list. It also allows further access to displaying and controlling system parameters.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Fill inn the password.3. limited access override etc. POINTS DISP 2 • A window.

Acknowledge This function is used to allow alarms to be received and acknowledged on Operator Stations that normally would not receive them. The system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. Mimics.3.20 Access control system The Limited Access Override softbutton-group is an access control system based on the use of passwords. The Limited Access Override softbutton-group consists of : Acknowledge. The password expiration time can be set to any number of minutes. do the following: 312401/B 201 .Operational procedures. Superuser and Password. Commissioning. To activate and deactivate this function. Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions.

use the trackball . Note When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes. And click on the OK softbutton. the override function will be turned off. point. 2 3 To activate the function.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE ACK is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the number of minutes has past. and click on the softbutton Acknowledge off 202 312401/B . just click on the Acknowledge off softbutton. point. just use the trackball . and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Acknowledge. • The Softbutton which said Acknowledge. the password will not automatically expire. 5 If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. will now say Acknowledge off. 4 Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. To turn of the override function again. • The System Information Display window will now be opened.

2 4 Fill in the password and the number of minutes the function is going to be active. the override function will be turned off. • The System Information Display window will now be opened. and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Mimics. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.) components you normally don’t have access to. 5 If you want to turn off the override function before the number of minutes has passed. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • When the number of minutes has past. • The Softbutton which said Mimics. etc. close. And click on the OK softbutton. will now say Mimics off. It is used to control (start.Operational procedures. open. 312401/B 203 . stop. Alarm and Monitoring System Mimic This function allows system control through the mimic pictures. use the trackball . just click on the Mimics off softbutton. 3 To activate the function. point. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE MIM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor.

tag description. point. point. alarm groups. and click on the softbutton Mimics off. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Note When the number of minutes is sat to 0 minutes. alarm delays. use the trackball . Commissioning This function allows changing of alarm limits. event limits. 3 To activate the function. the password will not automatically expire. To turn of the override function again. just use the trackball . and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Commissioning. • The System Information Display window will now be opened. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. 2 204 312401/B . Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station.

alarm delays. and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Superuser. and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. Superuser This function makes it possible to change alarm limits.Operational procedures. event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE COM is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. • When the 30 minutes has past. just click on the Commissioning off softbutton. 3 To activate the function. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. will now say Commissioning off. INFO DISPLAY. • The Softbutton which said Commissioning. the override function will be turned off. Note Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. 5 If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed. use the trackball . 312401/B 205 . Alarm and Monitoring System 4 Fill in the password. 2 Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM • The System Information Display window will now be opened. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details. point.

will now say Superuser off.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 4 Fill in the password. Password 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. 5 If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed. • When the 30 minutes has past. 2 Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM • The System Information Display window will now be opened. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE SUP is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. INFO DISPLAY. and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. • The Softbutton which said Superuser. 206 312401/B . Note Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. the override function will be turned off. just click on the Superuser off softbutton.

• When the 30 minutes has past. Note Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. alarm status. the override function will be turned off. point. use the trackball . • The Softbutton which said Password.Operational procedures. 6. 5 If you want to turn off the override function before the 30 minutes has passed.21 How to display Distributed Processing Unit information This procedure display all parameters for each tag such as values. and click on the OK softbutton to activate the function. Or click on the softbutton called Release Access in Tag Details. will now say Password off. alarm limits etc. and click with the left button on the softbutton called: Password.3. Alarm and Monitoring System 3 To activate the function. • The text ACCESS OVERRIDE KEY is displayed at the upper part of the monitor. Do the following: 312401/B 207 . 4 Fill in the password. just click on the Password off softbutton.

2 Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM • The System Information Display window will now be opened. 2 3 6. At the upper right side on the System Information Display window. • A window appears with a request for a password. 5 6 Choose the time zone by using the drop-down combo box. Click on the Unit Display softbutton.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Open the SYSTEM INFORMATION DISPLAY. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. Fill in the number of the wanted Distributed Processing Unit in this box. Set. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear. beside it. • The information on the selected Distributed Processing Unit will now be shown. 3 Click on the softbutton called. The procedure can be found in How to display system information on page 200. Click OK. INFO DISPLAY. or push the enter button. Unit Display. under the text Timezone. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.22 How to change time zone This function is used to change time zone when sailing eastwards or westwards. is a box with the text. And click on the OK softbutton. 208 312401/B .3. 4 Fill in the password.

• The System Information Display window will now be opened. • A window appears with a request for a password. 3 Click on the softbutton called: Set System Time. 6.Operational procedures. The K-Chief 500 system time is set to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC formerly known as GMT). 2 312401/B 209 .3. And click OK. all time changes must be made in the master clock. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. and only minor corrections such as if the time is not quite correct should be made here.23 How to change system time Note Use the “change time zone” function above when going between different time zones. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will appear. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. 4 Fill in the password. Alarm and Monitoring System Note If the system is fitted with a master clock.

See Acknowledge on page 201 for more details.3.24 Info field This function is only for use by Kongsberg Maritime. See Mimic on page 203 for more details.3.26 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves This function allows controlling of pumps and valves from Operator Stations which normally would not allow it. 6.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 Use the drop-down combo boxes and select date and time.25 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms This function allows acknowledging of alarms from Operator Stations which would not normally allow it.3. Then click on the OK softbutton. Note If the system is fitted with a master clock. 6. 6. all time changes must be made in the master clock. 210 312401/B . • The new date and time is transferred to the other Operator Stations in the network if the Operator Station you are working at is set up to transfer this data.

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

6.3.27 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer
1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY. • The System Information Display window will now be opened. 3 Click on the softbutton called: Disable CRP buzzer. • A window appears with a request for a password. 4 5 Fill in the password. Click on the OK softbutton. • The CRP buzzer is now disabled. • The text on the softbutton changes to Enable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will be displayed. To activate the buzzer again, do the following: 1 2 Open the System Information Display if it is not already open. Use the trackball , point, and click with the left button on the Enable OCP buzzer softbutton • The CRP buzzer is now active. • The text on the softbutton changes to Disable OCP buzzer. • In the upper part of the screen, in the status area, the text ACCESS OVERRIDE BUZ will disappear.

2

6.3.28 How to change tag parameters for a channel
This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. Do the following:

312401/B

211

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

1 2

The alarmgroups are listed on the left side of the TCP. Use the fingertip and touch the wanted alarmgroup. Use the trackball , point and double click on the line with the wanted tag. • Tag Details for that tag will be displayed.

3 4 5

Double click on the parameter you want to change. A window appears with a request for a password. Fill in the password and click on the Ok softbutton. • The parameter can now be changed to the wanted value. • The display picture is updated, and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and any other Operator Station in the system.

Tag Details image on page 212 gives an illustration of a Tag Details image. Figure 84 Tag Details image

There are three softbuttons on the bottom of the tag details window. It is Tag Details, Advanced Tag Details and Tag Application. The following information is displayed by clicking on them:
Tag Details

212

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

Shows the normal tag details display. All parameters displayed here can be changed by the operator. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Enable, stops checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Disable, starts checking this tag against alarm limits. Clicking on the softbutton, Offscan Value, allows you to insert a simulated value when the tag is off scan. This may be used while waiting to replace a defective sensor.
Advanced Tag Details

Shows a full list of all tag details. All parameters displayed in bold characters can be changed by the user without a password. Use the Parameter Filter on the right side to reduce the number of displayed parameters.
Tag Application

Lists other tags related to this tag. Only used for advanced applications and system commissioning. The following two tables explains what the different parameters for analogue and digital input tags are used for:
Analogue input channel parameters
Parameter name Tag name Tag number Description Function Value Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel type Type Text Number Text Text Number Number Number Number Adjustable No No Yes No No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Measured value scaled to technical value and Filtered Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled Analog/Digital All tags in the system are divided into different groups All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list

Type Control Room Panel alarm group Bridge group

Text Number Number

No Yes Yes

Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan

Number Number Number Number

Yes Yes Yes Yes

312401/B

213

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

Parameter name Offscan value Inhibited by tag Access group Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Dynamic Dead Band Counts Low Counts High Eng. Units Low Eng. Units High Alarm On-Delay1 Alarm Off-Delay1 Alarm On-Delay2 Alarm Off-Delay1 Inhibit On-Delay Inhibit Off-Delay

Type Number Text Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number

Adjustable Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Function Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instrument maximum value High/Low delay in 1 second High/Low delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second

Digital input channel parameters
Parameter name Tag name Description Function State Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel type Type Text Text Text Text Number Number Number Adjustable No No No No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Input status after time delay Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled

214

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

Parameter name Control Room Panel alarm group Bridge group

Type Number Number

Adjustable Yes Yes

Function All tags in the system are divided into different groups All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. to acknowledge this alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Invert input status

Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Inhibited by tag Access group Enable Event on Open Enable Event on Closed Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay Alarm On Delay Alarm Off Delay Signal Cond On Delay Signal Cond Off Delay Signal Cond Invert

Number Number Number Number Text Number Yes/No Yes/No Number Number Number Number Number Number Yes/No

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

6.3.29 How to change Deviation parameters
How to change limits.

This function is used to set limits for alarm blocking, and deviation from the corrected value. For instance used for main engine exhaust gas temperature. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION
PARAM C

2

• The new image on the screen will look like the figure underneath, A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display on page 216.

312401/B

215

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

Figure 85

A typical Deviation Parameter Configuration display

3

Use the trackball and click on the limit you want to change. • A window is opened.

4 5

Type in the new wanted value. Click Ok.

Use this procedure to change any value on this display.
Note

When the average temperature is below a preset value, the deviation alarm is blocked.
How to make profile

The average cylinder temperature is used as reference for deviations. For this reason it is necessary to correct the temperature of each cylinder, to get the same temperature in all

216

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

cylinders as reference. This correction is done when running the engine at full load and can be done in two ways, automatic correction and manual correction.
Automatic correction

1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION
PARAM C

2 3 4

Use the trackball and click on the text which says: AUTO. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction. Push the enter button. • All values found for Current deviation are moved to Correction, and Current deviation should read 0 for all cylinders.

Manual correction

1

Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: DEVIATION
PARAM C

2 3 4

Use the trackball and click on the text which says: MAN. It can be found on the right side of the text, Profile correction. Use the trackball , point, and click to highlight the value for each cylinder after the text “Correction”. Type in the value for each cylinder one by one. • The value for each cylinder under Current deviation should read 0. • For information about ”Exhaust mean value tag items” refer to chapter Exhaust mean value tag items on page 397.

312401/B

217

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

6.3.30 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration
Do the following procedure to get access to the Watch Calling Configuration: 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called:
WATCHCALLING CONFIG

2

6.3.31 How to set the On Duty engineer
Note

In order to set On duty engineer, the system must be in control watch. 1 Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. 2 If for example the 2nd engineer shall be sat on duty, just touch the thumbnail which says, 2ND ENG ON DUTY. • A indicator beside the officers title on the Watch Calling Units are lit. • Down in the left corner of the OS screen, the , a text with who is on duty is displayed. 3 To take the officer off duty again, click on the same thumbnail again.

6.3.32 How to select the Watch Responsible location
Note

This procedure requires that an engineer is sat to on duty. Refer to chapter on page .

218

312401/B

(To illustrate this procedure the WCALL ENGINE main group is used as an example. Use the following procedure to change Watch Responsible location. • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them. The calling can be done by the following methods: Using the Operator Station: The softbuttons depends on the system configuration.3. the status will be shown at the function window on the Operator Station. (It depends on the system configuration if there are both main groups or one of them. Which officer and/or engineer you can call depends on the system configuration. This can be done in the following ways: On the Operator Station: 1 Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO.Operational procedures. • The indicator for the new location will flash and make a sound until it is accepted at that location. 6.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.) 312401/B 219 .33 How to call officers From the Operator Station you can call the different officers and engineers. The indicator for the previous location will be switched off (no longer lit). • When the watch responsibility has been accepted.) The main groups can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • The indicator will be steady lit when the watch responsibility has been accepted. 1 Touch the TCP on the main group called: WCALL ENGINE or WCALL CARGO. On the Watch Bridge Unit: 1 Push the button for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH buttons). Alarm and Monitoring System The engine control room is the default Watch Responsible location. 2 Touch the softbutton for the wanted watch responsible location (BRIDGE WATCH or ENG WATCH). To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example.

1 Push the CALL DUTY ENG button or the CALL ALL ENG button on the Watch Bridge Unit (depending on who you want to call). 2 To cancel the call. just touch the same thumbnail again. • The call indicator will be lit. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. 2 Touch one of the thumbnail which says CALL DUTY ENG or CALL ALL ENG(depending on who you want to call). The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • The thumbnails for the chosen main group will be shown under the main groups. push the same button again. The called engineer/engineers signs the call by pushing the ACK button. 220 312401/B . The image underneath is an illustration of how it may look like. To illustrate this procedure the CALL DUTY ENG and the CALL ALL ENG buttons are used as an example. • A indicator beside the called engineer/engineers title on the Watch Calling Units starts to sound and are lit. On the Watch Bridge Unit: The buttons depends on the system configuration. 3 To cancel the call.

35 How to define watch calling Off-Duty mode When an engineer/officer or a group of engineers/officers are on duty. and page 2 will appear.3.Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. the Watch Bridge unit and Watch Cabin units are set to On Duty mode. • The new qualification has now been set. What is Off Duty active The panels will not sound an alarm but will continue to display the alarm information. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted qualification. the qualifications table needs to be updated. What is Off Duty passive 312401/B 221 . • A similar window opens: 2 3 4 5 The different qualifications equals a number.34 How to change the engineer qualifications When a new engineer reports aboard with qualifications different from the engineer being replaced. When an engineer is Off Duty his or her’s panel(s) can be defined as either active or passive. Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP. Click on the OK softbutton. 6.3. And the text has changed to the selected qualification. Click on the qualification text beside the officer who are being replaced. (The following example shows a qualification change for the Chief engineer:) 1 To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapterHow to access the Watch Calling Configuration on page 218.

These are the panels in his’ or her’s cabin and in public areas. and page 2 will appear.3. 5 6. Pushing the buttons on a LCD-type panel will display the alarms. • The new mode has now been sat. Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted mode. (The LEDs on the LED-type panels will remain dark). Unacknowledged alarms will have an ”*” in front. 1 To open the Watch Calling Configuration follow the procedure in chapter How to access the Watch Calling Configuration on page 218. Click on the OK softbutton. the Chief engineer is being replaced. When an engineer is On duty. Click on the mode text beside the officer it concern. each of these panels are in On Duty active mode. LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Since each ships configuration is different the illustration may differ from your system.36 How to change the owner of the Watch Calling panel Each On Duty engineer has a group of panels defined as “belonging” to that engineer-position. (In this example. And the text has changed. 222 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 The panels will not sound an alarm. 1 is active and 0 is passive.) • A similar window opens: 2 3 4 The different modes equals a number. Push the PAGE DOWN button on the CRP.

For example. all panels defined as Chief Engineer will be activated when the Chief Engineer is on duty.Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System Note This configuration can only be done at the master Remote Operator Station. point. there is a definition of the groups. the 3rd engineer’s panel is being assigned to someone else) • A similar window to this is opened: • On the right side of the screen. and click on the softbutton called:Watchcalling Configuration. (In this example. 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: SERVICE. It may look like this: 312401/B 223 . and the public areas. The panels can be defined to a group so that all alarms to the On duty officer are sent to all panels defined for the position. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Each panel has a unique serial number. Click on the officer whose panel is being assigned to someone else. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SYSTEM INFO DISPLAY 2 3 4 Use the trackball .

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

5 6

Use the numeric keys on the CRP to select the wanted officer to assign the panel to. Click on the OK softbutton.

6.3.37 How to make your own short trend display
Introduction to short trend

The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. To display the data you can use the trend display. The trend display contains a graph selector panel where you can select between up to 8 different graph views. Each graph view can have up to 8 plots. You can select any tag for plot presentation. You will also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The settings will be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. When the desired tags are selected, you can select an hour in the time-line panel to plot the corresponding data. If you select the current hour, the system will continue to add changes to the graph upon changes in the tags. The system also allows you to save an image for later reference. A preserve hour facility will save all tag data for a selected hour for later reference.

224

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

Figure 86

The short trend display

How to make your own short trend display

Do the following: 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: SHORT
TREND

2 3 4

Select a graph by selecting one of the eight radio buttons in the graph selector panel. Right click on one of the empty plot labels and select SELECT TAG in the pop-up menu. The SELECT TAG DIALOGUE will pop up. Select a tag in the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. If desired, use the filter to reduce the number of tags shown. Press OK to exit the SELECT TAG DIALOGUE. Repeat step 5 to 7 to add more tags. . Click on an hour in the time-line panel to plot the data.

5 6 7 8

312401/B

225

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

If more than one tag shall be selected for plotting, there is an alternative way of doing this. In the upper part of the dialogue box is a check box with this text beside it: Automatically select the next plot when a tag is selected. Use the trackball and click in this check box. When this function is activated you can directly select the next tag you want to plot in the same diagram. Step 8 in the procedure above says to repeat step 5 to 8. But with this function activated you just repeat step 6 and click on the OK softbutton to add more tags in the diagram. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section on page . Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 237.
How to select time in the trend display

The time-line panel present the last 24 hours with the current hour at the right end. If an hour is selected, the corresponding files are read from the hard disk. If the user selects current hour, the data is retrieved from the logging server instead, and the trend is continuously updating additional changes to the tags. Every new hour the labels are shifted one position to the left. Figure 87 The time-line at 16 hours with the 07 hour selected

Figure 88 selected

The time-line at 16 hours with the current hour

Do the following to select an hour: 1 2 3 Position the cursor by using the trackball slightly to the right of the desired hour. Left-click. Observe that the selected hour is marked and that the corresponding data is plotted in the graph.

Note

The selected hour can also be changed by using the left and right arrow keys.

226

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display

Each plot has its own y-axis. This makes it possible to manipulate them individually to make a more readable graph picture. You can zoom and pan a single plot or several plots at a time. Do the following to change a plot’s y-axis: 1 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the plot’s y-axis. Note that the axis label’s font is changed to BOLD. 2 Select the axis by clicking on it. • The axis labels background colour is changed to black to indicate that the axis is selected for y-axis manipulation. • When one axis or more is selected the y-axis control is displayed in the upper left corner of the plot area. Figure 89 Y-axis zoom and pan control

Repeat step 1 and 2 to add other axes. To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as follows: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • In: Zoom in • Out: Zoom out • Auto: Set the axis to display the complete plot in 95% of the plot area • Set: Manually key in the minimum and maximum values • X: Deselects all selected axes and hide the y-axis control The arrow keys around the trackball can also be used to change the selected y-axis: • Up: Move the axis up • Down: Move the axis down • Left: Zoom in • Right: Zoom out 5 Repeat step 1 and 2 on already selected plots to deselect an axis. It is also possible to select all the y-axis: 1 Click on the MENU softbutton. 2 A context menu is opened. 3 Select Y-Scale, by clicking on the text. 4 Select Select all plots, by clicking on the text.

3 4

312401/B

227

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

5

To change the selected y-axis use the buttons in the y-axis control as described in the list above.

How to zoom and pan the x-axis in the trend display

The graph includes one x-axis for all plots. Use the functions of the x-axis zoom and pan control to zoom and pan the x-axis. Figure 90 X-axis zoom and pan control

Click the buttons as follows to change the graph’s x-axis: Pan the graph to the left Pan the graph to the right Zoom out Zoom in The selected point in time will be illustrated in the time display to the right. In the sample below the graph is set to display the time between 10:35 and 10:40 approximately. Figure 91 Time display

How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display

It is possible to switch on and off a function whereby the plot’s actual position is marked with a small square. When the cursor is positioned over one of the points, a tool-tip box will pop-up displaying the point’s time stamp and actual value.

228

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

Figure 92

Plot point value

Do the following to enable the display of plot points: 1 2 Position the cursor by using the trackball on the menu softbutton. Right click to open the context menu.

3 4

Select View, by clicking on the text. Select Points, to enable or disable displaying of plot points.

How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor

It is possible to switch on and off a cursor in the graph area. By positioning the cursor in x horizontally, the plot’s corresponding value is displayed in the plot label. A tool-tip with exact time information is also generated. Do the following to switch the cursor on: 1 Right click in the plot area to open the context menu.

2

Select Show cursor. The cursor will be displayed and the graph label will indicate the cursor’s time position.

312401/B

229

Kongsberg K-Chief 500

Figure 93

Cursor’s time position

3

Move the cursor to read values for other points: a b c Move the cursor near the vertical cursor. Click and hold the left button while moving the cursor horizontally. Release the left button.

The values are now updated.
How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display

It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the x-axis on and off. Figure 94 Display of x-axis grid-lines

Do the following to enable the display of x grid-lines: 1 2 Position the cursor on the menu softbutton, by using the trackball . Right click to open the context menu.

230

312401/B

Operational procedures, Alarm and Monitoring System

3 4

Select View, by clicking on the text. Select Gridlines X-Axis to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines.

How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display

It is possible to switch the display of grid-lines for the y-axis on and off. The grid-line is connected to the plot’s y-axis and will have the same colour. Only grid-lines for one y-axis may be visible simultaneously. Figure 95 Display of y-axis grid-lines

1 2

Position the cursor on a plot label, by using the trackball . Right click to open the context menu.

312401/B

231

means that the line is drawn between the points only by use of vertical and horizontal lines. with a colour derived from the plot colour. The base value is set to zero by default. Figure 96 Fill-to-base function The picture above shows the difference between a filled plot and a plot not. How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display A function called Fill-to-base enables the plot to colour the area between a pre-defined value and the plot value. Digital. but it may be changed by selecting the menu item Set base. 232 312401/B . Repeat step 1 to 3 on another plot to enable grid-lines for the selected plot. by using the trackball . This mode is best suited for digital values. 3 Select Fill to base to enable or disable the fill function.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 4 Select Show grid lines to enable or disable displaying of grid-lines for the selected plot. Do the following to enable the fill function for a plot: 1 2 Position the cursor on a plot label. Right click to open the context menu. How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display The plot may be drawn in a digital or interpolated mode.

How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display You can add an annotation to each plot in a graph. Alarm and Monitoring System In the ‘interpolated’ mode. 3 Select Interpolate to enable or disable the interpolation mode. Right click to open the context menu. This mode is best suited for analogue type of values. Figure 97 Digital and interpolated mode Do the following to switch between the two modes: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want to change. An annotation is a mark that can be positioned on the plot to mark a point of special interest. the line is drawn as a straight line between the points assuming that the value has changed gradually rather than jumped to the new value. 312401/B 233 .Operational procedures.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 98 Annotation Do the following to add an annotation: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want. Right click to open the context menu. 3 Select Annotation to enable or disable the annotation. How to remove a plot in the trend display Do the following to remove a plot: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the plot label that belongs to the plot you want. 234 312401/B . Right click to open the context menu. The Annotation symbol is shown in the plot label. 4 Drag and drop the Annotation symbol to the desired position on the graph.

2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the Meny softbutton. How to display an image in the image repository It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository. Alarm and Monitoring System 3 Select Remove to remove the plot. 2 Left click to open the menu. 4 Select Save image to make a snapshot of the currently selected graph. The images in the repository can be viewed by using the built-in image viewer. 312401/B 235 . You can view saved snapshots by using the built-in image viewer.Operational procedures. 3 Right click to open the menu. Do the following to save an image of a graph: 1 Select the graph that you want to save a snapshot of. Do the following to view an image in the image repository: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor between on the Meny softbutton. How to save an image to the image repository It is possible to make a snapshot of a graph and save it to an image history repository.

MM month. the oldest data set is deleted. Select a graph view in the graph selector panel to exit the image viewer. select a thumbnail in the list view on the left side. Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Select Image Viewer to display the Image Viewer. Right click on the Menu softbutton. This function makes a copy of the stored data for the currently selected hour. The data is named using the format YYMMDD_HH where YY denominates year. Figure 99 Image Viewer 4 5 To display it. DD day and HH hour. When 10 data sets are stored and the function is executed once more. Up to 10 data sets can be preserved. Do the following to preserve an hour: 1 2 3 Select the hour you want to preserve in the time-line panel. 236 312401/B . How to preserve an hour in the trend display It is possible to preserve an hour for later reference.

Do the following to load a preserved hour: 1 2 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. and save and load the display settings manually. 4 Load one of the preserved hours by clicking on it. Alarm and Monitoring System 4 Select Preserve hour to preserve the currently selected hour. How to preserve trend display settings manually The trends display settings are normally saved automatically. • The data for the hour is loaded and displayed. Right click on the Menu softbutton. How to load an preserved hour in the trend display It is possible to display data from preserved hours instead of the available 24 hours log. 312401/B 237 . If you want to change the settings without saving your changes. 3 Select Load preserve hour to open the Preserved hours sub-menu. This will make sure that your plot settings remain the same after a system restart.Operational procedures. it is possible to switch off the automatic saving.

6. 238 312401/B . In addition.38 How to make your own long trend display Introduction to long trend The system maintains a log of all changes to all tags for the last 24 hours. 3 Select Save automatically. where you can select between up to eight different graph views. Each graph view can have up to eight plots. press Load. select Clear all. The settings may be saved and will automatically be reloaded upon system restart. 2 Right click on the Menu softbutton. You can select any of the configured tags for plot presentation. it is possible to configure up to 100 tags for long time trending. You may also manipulate the y-axis settings individually to make a more readable picture. The long trend display contains a graph selector panel. The logging interval may be set for each tag individually. To display the data. 4 You can then operate the Save menu item. the long trend display is used.3.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Do the following to switch off the automatic saving: 1 Use the trackball and position the cursor on the graph menu icon. ranging from 1 minute (giving 5 days) to 20 minutes (giving 100 days). If you want to remove all plots and plot settings in the graph. If you want to reload the setting again.

Alarm and Monitoring System The system also allows you to save an image for later reference.Operational procedures. Figure 100 The long trend display How to operate the long trend display The operation of the long trend display is nearly identical to operating the short trend display. Refer to the following issues in the short trend display chapter for further reference: How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display on page 228 How to display the plot’s point values in the trend display using the cursor on page 229 How to display x-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 230 How to display y-axis grid-lines in the trend display on page 231 How to display ‘filled’ plot in the trend display on page 232 How to make a plot to draw interpolated in the trend display on page 232 312401/B 239 .

to open the dialogue box below. Select Long trend setup from the menu. Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: LONG TREND 2 3 4 Click on the Menu softbutton.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to add an annotation to the plot in the trend display on page 233 How to remove a plot in the trend display on page 234 How to save an image to the image repository on page 235 How to configure a long trend Do the following to configure a long trend 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group called: CONFIG DISPLAY on the TCP. 240 312401/B . It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator.

Alarm and Monitoring System 5 6 7 8 9 Find and select a tag in the Available tags panel. Click Add to add the tag to Configured tags for long trend. 312401/B 241 . To view the updated data you can select Menu→Load. Use filters as desired. Select the Load every hour to activate this function. To remove an entry from logging. Please be aware that if this function is activated. Change the y-axis for the plots as described in the section How to manipulate the y-axis in the trend display on page 227. an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. Configured tags for long trend grid. Save your graph settings as described in the section How to preserve trend display settings manually on page 237. an additional Refresh button will appear in the upper right corner of the trend display. select the tag in the Please note that it will take some time before changes to the configuration is visible in the display. If tags are removed all the logged data for all tags below the removed tags will be cleared. it may interrupt your system at an inconvenient point in time and it may take a few seconds to load the data. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data. It is also possible to get the trend display to automatically load the updated data every 1 hour. If more than one hour has passed since you loaded data. How to load logged data in the long trend display Every hour new data is added to the log files on disk by the log server. Repeat step 6 and 7 to add more tags.Operational procedures. and press Delete. Click in the Sampling interval / duration field to change the logging interval. Click on this button to reload the data. Zoom and pan the x-axis as described in the section on page .

the following takes place: • The buzzer is activated • The alarm is indicated in red at the bottom of the display • External alarm devices such as engine room horns are activated • The last unacknowledged alarm is displayed in red at the bottom of the display Do the following to handle the alarm: 1 Push Sound off to turn audible alarms off. Attend to the alarm situation.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6. 6. • This turns off the buzzer and any external alarm devices. 2 Push the ACK button. 3 4 Push the ACK button again to acknowledge the next alarm and so on until no alarms are unacknowledged.2 How to display alarm history Figure 101 Typical alarm history display 242 312401/B .4.1 How to handle alarm events When a process parameter enters an alarm state.4. • This acknowledges the alarm displayed at the bottom of the display (the last incoming alarm).4 MOS operational procedures 6. • This alarm text disappears.

Alarm and Monitoring System 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.4 How to display alarm group information 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. Push 2 to display the Alarm Summary. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time. 2 3 4 312401/B 243 .3 How to display alarm summary 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. Push ENTER to display alarm details. 2 3 4 5 6. Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu. Push ENTER to display alarm details. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select an alarm group. Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu.4. Push 1 to display the Alarm History. Push 1 to display the Alarm Menu. Push 3 to display the Alarm Group Information.Operational procedures. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all alarms a page at a time. 2 3 4 5 6. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.4. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed.

5 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. Push ENTER. 6 Keyboard click 7 8 Push ENTER. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 5 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the item you want to change. 7 6. 244 312401/B . 11 Push ENTER. Push ENTER. Push ENTER to display alarm details. 2 3 Colour palette 4 5 Push ENTER. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select Day. Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag group. 9 Keyboard light 10 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 6 Push ENTER.4. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select On or Off. Night or Dawn.

– On: Indicates that access at this level is possible – Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible. open. event limits and enabling/disabling of alarms. Push 3 to display the User Access menu. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes. etc. close. Access automatically expire after 30 minutes. Used to control (start. 6. 312401/B 245 . The status of this system is available as follows: 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. The following access levels are available: • Monitoring: Only for viewing information.Operational procedures. Note 2 Only one user access level can be selected at a time. • Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits. enabling/disabling of alarms and the system access for each Operator Station. • Superuser: Allows changing of alarm limits. tag description.4. 13 Push ENTER. such as for instance operating the power management from the cargo control room.6 About password access An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. • User: Allows system control through the mimic pictures. alarm delays. stop. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. alarm groups. alarm delays. event limits. • The user access levels are displayed.) components you normally don’t have access to. Alarm and Monitoring System Screen brightness 12 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value.

as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. select the DPU and push ENTER. Push 6 to display the DPU Overview. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to step through each DPU one at a time. 246 312401/B . Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it. 2 3 4 5 6 Tag details view 7 Push ENTER to display the parameters for a particular tag. tags and tag details Distributed Processing Units are often abbreviated DPUs. Use the Page down and Page up buttons to step through all DPUs one page at a time.4. 1 Push MENU to display the main menu.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Note Do not leave the system while Commissioning or Superuser password access is available.7 How to display information about DPUs. For information about the tags for a particular DPU. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed. Use the right and left side of the navigator key to display all available information for each tag. 6.

Use the function keys to operate the tag when available. 12 Push 4 to set the selected tag as the Start Tag.Operational procedures. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed. • The Tag Menu is displayed. 10 Push 2 to display a mimic picture for this tag. This menu allows you to display various information about each tag as follows: 9 Push 1 to display the parameters for this particular tag →Tag Details. 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. 13 Push 5 to go to the main menu. 6. 2 312401/B 247 . Push 6 to display the DPU Overview. Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 102 Tag details display Tag menu When the tags for a DPU is displayed: 8 Push MENU.8 How to change tag parameters This function is used to inspect and adjust parameters for analogue and digital measuring points. 11 Push 3 to display the Alarm status for this tag (if any).4.

6 7 Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the tag you want to change parameters for. 4 5 Push ENTER. 9 Clear the existing value using the CLR button. 8 Push ENTER. – White parameter text: Parameter can be changed. 248 312401/B . • A parameter entry window is displayed. Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the parameter you want to change. • Colours are used to indicate if the current access level allows a parameter to be changed: – Grey parameter text: Can not be changed at current access level setting.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Use the Page down and Page up buttons and/or the top and bottom of the navigator key to select the DPU you want. Push ENTER to display the parameters for the selected tag.

• The new value is inserted. to acknowledge this alarm Alarm limit Type Control Room Panel alarm group Bridge group Text Number Number No Yes Yes Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Offscan value Inhibited by tag Access group Limit Alarm Low Low Number Number Number Number Number Text Number Number Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 312401/B 249 . Note A red text indicates that you have typed an illegal value. 11 Push ENTER. Parameter name Tag name Tag number Description Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel type Type Text Number Text Number Number Number Adjustable No No Yes No No Yes Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled All tags in the system are divided into different groups All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. Analogue input tag parameters The following table explains what the different parameters for analogue input tags are used for.Operational procedures. If you make an error push ESC to cancel the input. Alarm and Monitoring System 10 Type in the new value. The display picture is updated and the new value is transferred to the Distributed Processing Unit and other Midi Operator Stations and Operator Stations in the system.

Units High Alarm Off-Delay1 Alarm Off Delay1 Alarm Off Delay2 Alarm Off Delay2 Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instrument maximum value High/Low delay in 1 second High/Low delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second HighHigh/LowLow delay in 1 second Digital input tag parameters The following table explains what the different parameters for digital input tags are used for. Units Low Eng. Parameter name Tag name Description Function State Distributed Processing Unit number Channel number Channel type Type Text Text Text Text Number Number Number Adjustable No No No No No No No Function Unique code describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Input status after time delay Unique number of the node Number of the channel connected Channel type is the specification of how the input signal is handled and scaled Analog/Digital All tags in the system are divided into different groups All tags going to the external alarm system are divided into different groups Type Control Room Panel alarm group Bridge group Text Number Number No Yes Yes 250 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Parameter name Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Dynamic Dead Band Counts Low Counts High Eng.

Operational procedures.4.10 How to change alarm delay Refer to How to change tag parameters on page 247. 6. 312401/B 251 . to acknowledge this alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Inhibit delay in 1 second Inhibit delay in 1 second Refer to another Tag or Channel Delay in 1 second Delay in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Delay of signal before handled by alarm system in 1 second Invert input status 6.9 How to change alarm limits Refer to How to change tag parameters on page 247.Inhibit Src TagNo Alarm On Delay Alarm Off Delay On Delay Off Delay Invert input Type Number Number Number Number Text Number Yes/No Yes/No Number Number Text Number Number Number Number Yes/No Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function Included in the autolog list Included in the noonlog list Included in the eventlog list Included in the offscan log list Tag to inhibit this channel Limited access id. Alarm and Monitoring System Parameter name Autolog Noonlog Eventlog Offscan Inhibited by tag Access group Enable Event on Open Enable Event on Closed Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay Al.4.

5. 6. check that the alarm is no longer displayed on the Watch Bridge Unit after the alarm condition is corrected. • The LED indicator will flash until the transfer is acknowledged. 2 To terminate the call push the button again.2 How to respond to alarms When an alarm condition occur. After a while. The ON DUTY engineer should also receive the alarm indicator and take appropriate action.1 How to receive a call When you receive a call.5.5.5. one of the watch location buttons is flashing.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6.4 How to transfer watch responsibility 1 Push WATCH RESPONSIBILITY to notify the other locations to accept the transfer of the watch responsibility.3 How to call the ON DUTY engineer 1 Push the CALL XXX button (button texts will vary) to notify the ON DUTY engineer to contact the bridge. When the indicator is steady lit watch responsibility has been transferred 252 312401/B . Read the alarm information on the display or the text next to the indicator. • Button texts on buttons used to receive the call will vary. 3 6. • The LED indicator will flash until the ON DUTY engineer has acknowledged the call.5 Watch Calling system operational procedures 6. the buzzer will sound and the alarm will be indicated on the Watch Bridge Unit. 1 Push SOUND OFF to acknowledge the call. 6. Do the following: 1 2 Push SOUND OFF. Then it will be steady lit.

LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. Off Duty ACTIVE The panel will not sound alarms.5. all Watch Cabin Units can be defined as either active or passive. This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Operator Stations.5 How to accept watch responsibility 1 When the indicator for your location begins to flash.7 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WCU) In Off Duty mode.5. 312401/B 253 . all Watch Bridge Units can be defined as either active or passive. The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark. Off Duty ACTIVE The panel will not sound alarms. • This acknowledges and accepts the transfer of watch responsibility to you. Off Duty PASSIVE The panel will not sound alarms. push the button for your watch location.Operational procedures. Pushing the controls on an LCD panel will display the alarms. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions.5. Off Duty PASSIVE The panel will not sound alarms. Figure 103 Watch Bridge Unit controls 6. This is done as part of the configuration in one of the Operator Stations. but all LED indicators and the display will show alarm conditions. 6.6 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode (on WBU) In Off Duty mode.

Pushing the controls on an LCD panel will display the alarms.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 LCD-type panels will display date and time information only. The LEDs on the alarm group-type panels will remain dark. 254 312401/B .

Operational procedures. Figure 104 ShipViewer menu and toolbar Toolbar buttons Print screen Save image to disk Print preview 312401/B 255 .6 ShipViewer operational procedures 6.2 Understanding the ShipViewer display Overview All ShipViewer functions are available through the menus bar. The most frequently used functions are also directly available through the toolbar buttons. Alarm and Monitoring System 6.6.6.1 Main ShipViewer functions The ShipViewer has the following main functions: • Counter display • Alarm displays • DPU displays • Deviation displays • Alarm group displays • Alarm summery displays • Alarm history displays • Selected points display • Selected trend display • Selected bargraph display • Mimic diagrams as found in the Operator Station 6. These are further described in the following.

while white is better for printing. and then either Select or Clear →No background colour. Dark blue is better when viewing some coloured texts. 256 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Open image file Display version and build information Previous window Next window (after having used a previous window) Alarm summary display Alarm history display Alarm group display Running hours display DPU display Deviation display Colour codes for data displays The channel data is colour coded as follows: • Green: The channel is in a normal state • Yellow: The channel is in an alarm state and acknowledged • Red: The channel is in an alarm state and not acknowledged • Cyan: The channel is in a high priority alarm state • Blue: The channel is inhibited • Orange: Not updated or invalid values The background colour can be set to either dark blue or white. 1 Select Settings in the menu bar.

1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard. 1 Scroll through the pages using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard. Alarms are sorted by date and time. 312401/B 257 . engines etc. click on the Alarm Display/Group Display softbutton (down to the left) repeatedly. To switch between the alarm group view and group view. The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. • The alarm and group displays are sorted by tag name. Alarms are sorted by date and time.3 Explanation of ShipViewer displays Alarm summary display The alarm summery display shows currently active alarm entries.6. Distributed Processing Unit display The Distributed Processing Unit (DPU) display shows all measuring points connected to each DPU.Operational procedures. When selecting the alarm group display. In this dialogue all alarm groups with active alarms are indicated by a red dot. Alarm group display The alarm group display shows all measuring points in the pre-defined alarm groups. Alarm history display The alarm history display shows active alarms and alarms returned to normal. Alarms acknowledged and returned to normal state are not displayed. Alarm and Monitoring System 6. These group where defined during commissioning of the K-Chief 500. 1 2 Select an alarm group by clicking on its softbutton. • The information is instantly updated as soon as something happens. included in the counter system of the K-Chief 500. generators. a dialogue containing all alarm groups appears on the screen. Counter display The counter display shows counters and lap counters for such components as pumps.

These may be cascaded or tiled when required. Selected points display The selected points display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. 6 Click OK. Each display can include up to eight tags. Display existing tag selection: 1 2 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected points display. (See the Windows drop down menu). • The selected points display is shown. Select one of the five groups and click OK. Use the Select pull down menu to select system. Selected trend display The selected trends display shows one of up to five groups containing customer selected tags. • The selected points display is shown. all other windows must be closed. 258 312401/B . However. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. Click on the Config button. when you want to configure a new display. • The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available. Each display can include up to 20 tags. 1 Scroll through all units using the Page Up and Page Down buttons on the keyboard. Make or alter tag selection: 1 2 3 4 5 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected points display. Select one of the five groups and click OK. Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. Select tags and push Add.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Deviation display The deviation display shows exhaust deviation data for all engines having deviation calculations in the K-Chief 500. Select up to twenty tags.

3 Click on the Config button. 6 Click OK. Selected bargraph display The selected bargraph display shows one of up to five bargraph display pages containing customer selected tags. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. 5 Select tags and push Add. all other windows must be closed. 3 Click on the Time button to select trend sample time.Operational procedures. • The selected trend display can be selected from any of the different systems available. all other windows must be closed. Alarm and Monitoring System Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. 8 Click Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. 4 Click Stop to halt sampling and Start to restart it again. 2 Select one of the five groups and clickOK. Note More than one window may be open simultaneously. Make or alter tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected trend display. However. 7 Click on the Time button to select trend sample time. 4 Select a system under Select. 5 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. Select up to eight tags. when you want to configure a new display. These may be cascaded or tiled when required. • The selected trend display is shown. 9 Select Grid to display a grid in the sampling window. (See the Windows drop down menu). (See the Windows drop down menu). • The selected trend display is shown. However. Display existing tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected trend display. Display existing tag selection: 312401/B 259 . Each display can include up to twelve tags. when you want to configure a new display.

• The selected bargraph display is shown. Make or alter tag selection: 1 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected bargraph display. 4 Use the Select pull down menu to select system. • The selected bargraph display is shown.6. 1 Click on the Mimics button on menu bar. 260 312401/B . • The Selected Points Configuration dialogue is displayed. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK. 2 Select one of the five groups and click OK.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 In the Displays drop down menu select: Selected bargraph display. Figure 105 ShipViewer mimics 6. • The selected points display can be selected from any of the different systems available.4 How to print displayed information Use the following procedure to print the information seen on the colour graphics display: 1 Select Settings→No background colour. Select up to twelve tags. 5 Select tags and click Add. 6 Click OK. The number and design of these mimic diagrams are ship dependent. Mimic diagrams 1 All mimic diagrams found in the Operator Station are available through the ShipViewer. 3 Click on the Config button. 2 Select a mimic diagram from the drop down list.

5 How to save ShipViewer images Use the following procedure to save the image seen on the colour graphics display: 1 2 3 Click on the Save icon in the tool bar. ShipViewer settings menu Figure 106 6. Alarm and Monitoring System • This reduces the amount of ink used when printing.Operational procedures.6. Use any program for handling pictures or bitmaps to view the file. • A standard “file save” dialogue is displayed.6. 2 Click on the Print icon in the tool bar.6 How to view saved mimic diagram files Use the following procedure to view a previously saved image: 1 Click on the Open icon in the tool bar. Enter file name and a location and click Save. 312401/B 261 . ShipViewer save dialogue (typical) Figure 107 6.

2 Select file name and a location and click Open. editing or creating bitmap images.a Microsoft program for viewing. • The file will be displayed using Paint .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • A standard “file open” dialogue is displayed. Figure 108 ShipViewer open file dialogue (typical) 262 312401/B .

It provides easy access to alarm view and easy detection of the position where the alarm occurs. This mimic has links to detailed information mimics of Bearing Wear Monitoring. To give the user a better overview of installed equipment and a fast overview of the condition.1 ME monitoring overview mimic The Main engine monitoring overview mimic gives you full access to all subsystems in your configuration.7.Operational procedures. Bearing Wear Monitoring information and bearing temperature measuring points. Figure 109 ME monitoring overview mimic 6.7 ME monitoring operational procedures 6. Alarm and Monitoring System 6.2 Bearing Wear Engine overview mimic The navigator button Bearing Wear will open the overview mimic. 312401/B 263 . Status of these points is shown with colours.7. there is a cross-section drawing of the engine showing where the sensor/measuring points are.

the navigator will open the Bearing Wear monitoring mimic. as follows: • BWM sensor deviation shown in text and bar graph • BWM cylinder deviation shown in text and bar graph • BWM average sensor value alarm showing as a square around bar graph for BWM sensor deviation • Bearing Wear sensor temperature shown as text • Status RUN: indicating when system is sending out new values and that engine is protected with alarm • Bar graph scale: ± 1.00 [mm] 264 312401/B . This mimic contains detailed information regarding the Bearing Wear monitoring system.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 110 Engine overview mimic function Bearing Wear monitoring mimic When the operator selects WEAR through the Engine overview mimic.

Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 111 Bearing wear monitoring mimic function System overview mimic This mimic indicates which part of the system that has a failure alarm. this will be displayed by the mimics. as well where sensors are connected. The System overview mimic shows the topology and display. Figure 112 Bearing Wear system overview mimic 312401/B 265 . If any bearing wear sensor fails.Operational procedures.

5 H 0.7 Sensor deviation alarm limits have two value sets. How to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters All adjustments regarding bearing wear monitoring system are available on Tag Details for Bearing Wear tag (CYL0x-AVE-S).5 0.5 –0.0 disables any alarm.5 0.3 0. Dependent upon system conditions.3 5.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Dynamic alarm limits To avoid unnecessary/false bearing wear alarms. the alarm system will change alarm limits accordingly. 266 312401/B . If the system is in learning mode.5 HH 0.3 0.5 0.3 –0. which depends L –0.7 regardless the condition of wear sensors.3 –5. LL Normal operation and all sensors OK Learning mode 1 or one or more sensors not approved –0.0 HH mm mm Normal operation and all sensors OK Learning mode 1 or one or more sensors not approved Note Limit = ±5. LL L –0. the bearing wear monitoring system is build up with dynamics alarm limits. The average sensor value alarm limit has in normal mode L/H-alarm = ±0.7 mm mm LL L H HH -0. no alarms are generated.7 -0. The intention of this mode is that the system after 500 running hours will download final data to sensors.5 mm -0.0 H 0.5 mm and LL/HH-alarm = ±0. on condition.7 mm Cylinder deviation alarm limits have two value sets. Default values are given below.3 0.5 -0. The Learning mode is only activated during first 500 hours running of the Main Engine.

tag Fore sensor dev tag Aft sensor dev tag Sensors aft input tags Sensors fore input tags Max diff F_A Gain Bearing no Sub type Type Text Number Text Text Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjust. Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 113 Tag Detail image of Bearing Wear tag The following table explains what the different parameters for bearing wear tag are used for: Parameter name Tag name Tag number Tag description Function Value RPM input tag BWM mode Cylinder dev.Operational procedures. No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Calculated value Tag reference Tag reference Tag reference Tag reference Tag reference Tag reference to data container Tag reference to data container Max allowed difference between sensors in deviation filter Gain for deviation filter Bearing number / cylinder number Functional sub-type 312401/B 267 .

Based on these events. The following table explains different events for bearing wear tag. and failure will be displayed as a value.failure description Normal Chan 1 Sensor Break Chan 1 Sensor P Overload Chan 1 Sensor N Overload Chan 2 Sensor Break Chan 2 Sensor P Overload Chan 2 Sensor N Overload Chan 3 Sensor Break Chan 3 Sensor P Overload Chan 3 Sensor N Overload Chan 4 Sensor Break Chan 4 Sensor P Overload Chan 4 Sensor N Overload Device Sensor Break Device Sensor P Overload Device Sensor N Overload Checksum Error in NVRAM Checksum Error in PROGRAM 268 312401/B . events will be generated. alarm dynamic limits will adjust automatically. This value is a code depending of type of fails sensor is reporting. The following table describes the type of system failure for bearing wear sensors: Value 0 101 102 103 201 202 203 301 302 303 401 402 403 501 502 503 507 508 Tag Details . Event E1 : Fore sensor deviation abnormal E2 : Aft sensor deviation abnormal E3 : Cylinder sensor deviation abnormal Type Bit Bit Bit Function Use largest alarm limits for fore deviation alarm Use largest alarm limits for aft deviation alarm Block alarms for cylinder deviation Sensor System Failure Each sensor has a system failure tag.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Dependant upon the condition of bearing wear system.

......0.. which makes it easy to open the file in Microsoft Excel: 0.Aug..CYL01-AVE-S min.......337. 16. 16.csv where xx is the number of the cylinder and yyyy the year..2008 10:49...034. 16...-0... 312401/B 269 .Aug.0..Aug. This log will give a good overview if there exists a slow progressing wear that can be repaired before it becomes critical.. then minimum and maximum: CYL01-AVE-S.2008 10:49.034.Operational procedures. 16. 16..446. The first column is the sample time: 16.. These files can be copied and be opened in an Excel sheet.2008 10:49..Aug. The following data is logged per cylinder: • TAGS – Sensor value FORE – Sensor value AFT – Average sensor value – Sensor deviation FORE – Sensor deviation AFT – Cylinder value • Type of value – Maximum value – Minimum value – Average value Data will be stored on: c:\ros\pdslog\BWlog\LongTermData Each cylinder will have its own file: Cylxx-yyyy.... The values are separated by semicolons....-0. The following information is available in this file: • Heading • Sample time The first line is the heading.2008 10:49. First the average value.. 0.2008 10:49...Aug.0.446.....285.. Each tag name shows up 3 times..337.. Alarm and Monitoring System Long Trend Logging The main purpose of the long term log is documentation to classification societies that no wear has occurred.0. A new log file will be started each year....CYL01-AVE-S max.2008 10:49.285..Aug.........

0. This will be stored on c:\ros\Pdslog\BWlog\Preserved and saved in separate folders..337.-0. Short Trend Alarm Logging When a bearing wear alarm occurs (sensor deviation.285. where the requested folder to trend log data is selected..034.175.-0. 0.. selection of preserved folder (24 h log data) A new display appears. cylinder deviation or sensor average).0. It is possible to trend a preserved alarm folder.349.0. Data is preserved for 23 hours before the alarm and 1 hour after the alarm..285.349. All details regarding the use of short trend displays are described in How to make your own short trend display on page 162.349.0.0.034.335.0. Values for all tags related to the bearing wear system will be stored.349...0.337..Kongsberg K-Chief 500 0. the correct folder has to be selected.-0. a preserved short trend alarm log will be stored. To be able to trend preserved data.285.-0. as shown below: 270 312401/B ....337.. 0.396.. 0.034. as shown below: Figure 114 Short trend display. The name of the folder is given by the date and time when the alarm occurs.0.

Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 115 Short trend display – select a folder 6. the system will generate an alarm.7. compared with the mean value for this engine. 312401/B 271 . the system stores a number of samples and calculates the difference between the largest and the lowest cylinder liner temperature within the set of samples. To be able to check scuffing conditions.3 Cylinder Liner – Fluctuating monitoring (scuffing) The background for this function is to avoid problems with scuffing inside cylinders (piston wall). The fluctuation is re-calculated every time the oldest sample is replaced with a new sample. By exceeding the alarm limit. Fluctuating temperatures of the cylinder liners is an indication of scuffing. This is the maximum fluctuation in the temperature.Operational procedures. Fluctuating alarm – alarm high An alarm is activated if the difference between the smallest sample and the largest sample is more than acceptable. The fluctuation in the temperature is the difference between these two temperatures. The calculation of fluctuation is performed continuously on each cylinder liner temperature sensor. The highest and lowest liner temperature is detected in the set of samples. The system will also generate an alarm if the fluctuation calculated for this temperature is greater than the alarm high-high limit.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Fluctuating deviation alarm – alarm high high (scuffing) This liner temperatures fluctuation is compared with the mean fluctuation of all liner temperatures of this engine. Blocking The alarms are not calculated if blocking is activated by the blocking input reference or the liner temperature is below inhibit low limit. There can be more than one liner temperature measurement to each cylinder. An alarm is activated if the difference between this fluctuating and the mean fluctuating is larger than the alarm high-high limit. The following conditions will disable alarm monitoring and priming: • Cylinder liner temp below low limit • Cylinder liner temp above high limit • Blocking tag with tag value below blocking limit Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic When the operator selects the Cylinder Liner Temperature mimic. This mimic contents the following detailed information regarding Cylinder liner monitoring: • Cylinder liner temperature shown in text and bar graph • Cylinder liner deviation temperature in text • Fluctuate temperature • Fluctuate deviation high high alarm (scuffing) • Mean cylinder liner temperature • Mean fluctuating temperature 272 312401/B . This can be used for activating priming for the actual cylinder. Activate priming The alarm high-high situation (deviation alarm) will activate the priming relay. the navigator will open the monitoring mimic.

Figure 117 Tag Detail image of fluctuate monitoring tag The following table explains what the different parameters for fluctuate monitoring tag are used for: 312401/B 273 .Operational procedures. Alarm and Monitoring System Figure 116 Short Cylinder liner temperature mimics How to use fluctuate monitoring parameters All adjustments regarding fluctuate monitoring tag are available on the Tag Detail parameter display.

1 deg C] Enter 20 to get a 2 deg C dead band The fluctuation must be this much below the alarm limit to reset an activated deviation alarm The dead band can not be larger than half the alarm high-high limit [0.1 deg C] Enter 4000 (four thousand) get a 400 (four hundred) deg C limit Lowest cylinder liner temperature where this tag type can be active Insert zero to de-activate this functionality Also note the inhibit tag reference [0. No No No No No Yes Function Unique code describing a tag Unique number describing a tag Description of a tag Short code describing the function of the tag Calculated value Time between each sample within a set of samples [0.1 deg C] Number of temperature samples in each calculation Enter 60 to keep 60 samples in the calculation Minimum value in inhibit tags value for being active This parameter is zero if the inhibit tag is binary Enter 400 to get a 40 RPM limit The tag reference to the cylinder liner sensor Note the alarm high description Max value Number Yes Low limit Number Yes Dead band scuffing alarm Number Yes Dead band deviation alarm Number Yes Samples Number Yes Inhibit treshold value Number Yes Cylinder liner temperature Text No 274 312401/B .1 deg C] Enter 500 (five hundred) get a 50 (fifty) deg C limit The fluctuation must be this much below the alarm limit to reset an activated scuffing alarm The dead band can not be larger than half the alarm high limit [0.1 sec] Enter 20 (twenty) to get a 2 second time between the samples Maximum accepted cylinder liner temperature Values above this are rejected [0.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Parameter name Tag name Tag number Tag description Function Value Sample time Type Text Number Text Text Number Number Adjust.

Alarm and Monitoring System Parameter name Fluctuating mean value Type Text Adjust.Operational procedures. No Function The reference to the tag holding the mean value of the fluctuation in all cylinder liner temperatures of this engine Note the alarm high-high description Insert zero to de-activate this functionality ME running or other binary source The calculations are stopped and any alarm is reset if inhibit is activated Insert zero to de-activate this functionality Also see the calculation low limit parameter (T3) Reference to an output tag / source for starting of priming of dedicated cylinder Activated by alarm high-high Insert a tag reference to activate the primer functionality / relay Disabled by blocking / inhibit Inhibit tag Text No Primer tag Text No 312401/B 275 .

276 312401/B . then alerts the master or other qualified officer.128(75) Performance standards for a Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System (BNWAS) and the bridge class notations for ”one-man bridge operation”. whenever passing it. Or push any external sound off found on the bridge. 7.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 7 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. 2 When you hear the prewarning. The system first alerts the officer of the watch through local alarm indication at the bridge unit. BRIDGE WATCH MONITORING SYSTEM 7. • If you fail to do so within the prewarning time. • Make sure to do this at an interval shorter than the alarm time. 1 To confirm that you are attending to the bridge push any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems panel.1 Overview The Bridge Watch Monitoring System is designed to monitor bridge activity and alert the master or other qualified navigators if the bridge becomes unattended. immediately push any key on the Bridge Watch Monitoring Systems panel or any external sound off found on the bridge.1 Normal use of the BWMS The purpose of Bridge Watch Monitoring is to continuously confirm that the bridge is attended. the alarm will sound in the designated areas on the ship.2 BWMS operational procedures 7. and if he/she is not responding.2. The system conforms to the requirements of IMO resolution MCS.

2 How to turn the system on/off To turn the system on or off requires the superuser password. Bridge Watch Monitoring System Figure 118 Normal display picture. 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds Figure 119 Alarm display.Operational procedures. the timer has expired 7. 312401/B 277 .2.

2 3 4 7. (See Normal display picture.2. 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277.2. 278 312401/B .) Push the function key for the backup navigator(s) you want to assign. If you needed to type in the password. Push the function key for AUTO (or MANUAL). If requested. Note The alarm will always sound in the captains quarters. 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277. Use the page down or page up to display all backup navigators. 1 Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. (See Normal display picture.3 How to select backup navigator on duty Backup navigator on duty are person(s) assigned to investigate if the Bridge Watch Monitoring System Alarm sounds. push the function key for ON (or OFF) again. type in the password and push ENTER. • Pushing the function key several times switches between selecting and not selecting the backup navigator. 1 2 Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. 2 3 7. Note In Auto-mode.4 How to turn system’s auto mode on/off To turn the system Auto-mode on or off requires the superuser password.) Push the function key for ON (or OFF). the system will automatically switch ON when the Autopilot is switched ON.

1 Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277. 3 Use the navigator key to select Internal Check Time. If requested. If you needed to type in the password. push the function key for AUTO (or MANUAL) again. 2 7. until the alarm is given.5 How to call for backup The system can be used to call for backup assistance at any time. Use the CLR key to remove the existing interval. • Audible and visual alarm indicators are activated. (See Normal display picture. 1 Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. 7.) Push ENTER. type in the password and push ENTER. (See Normal display picture. • This is the time from the last push of any external sound off or Bridge Watch Monitoring panel key.Operational procedures. 3 To cancel the call push Backup again. Type in the new interval. 2 312401/B 279 .2.6 How to adjust system timers Changing system timers requires the superuser password. 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277. 8 Push ENTER.2. Bridge Watch Monitoring System 3 4 If requested type in the password and push ENTER. • Allowable interval is between 3 and 12 minutes. • The Tag Details View for the Bridge Watch Monitoring System is shown.) Push the function key for Backup. 4 5 6 7 Push ENTER. even when the alarm interval has not expired.

see “How to set keyboard and screen configuration” below. Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select the item you want to change.8 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration 1 Push MENU to display the main menu. 13 Push ENTER. • For additional keyboard light and screen brightness settings. 12 Type in the new interval.7 How to change between day and night viewing To set the display for day or night viewing do the following: 1 Select the normal Bridge Watch Monitoring display picture. 10 Push ENTER. To change again push the key again.2. 2 3 Colour Palette 4 Push ENTER. • Allowable interval is between 0 and 3 minutes. and the alarm sounding in the captain and all navigation officers quarters and public areas. • This is the interval between the alarm sounding in the captain and backup officers quarters.2. 280 312401/B .) Push the function key for Day/Night. 2 7. (See Normal display picture. 7. 2 minutes and 53 seconds remaining before the alarm sounds on page 277. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed. Push 5 to display parameters for Keyboard and Screen.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 9 Use the navigator key to select Last Stage Delay. 11 Use the CLR key to remove the existing interval.

Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select On or Off. Screen Brightness 12 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. 2 312401/B 281 . • The user access levels are displayed. 11 Push ENTER.Operational procedures. Push ENTER. 13 Push ENTER. Night or Dawn. Off: Indicates that access at this level is not possible. Push 3 to display the User Access menu.9 How to change access level An access control system limits the possibilities to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters or information. On: Indicates that access at this level is possible.2. 7. 9 Keyboard Light 10 Use the Page down and Page up buttons to increase or decrease the value. From some display pictures it may be required to push MENU twice before the main menu is displayed. Bridge Watch Monitoring System 5 Use the top and bottom of the Navigator key to select Day. Push ENTER. 6 Keyboard Click 7 8 Push ENTER. The status of this system is available as follows: 1 Push MENU to display the main menu.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Note Only one user access level can be selected at a time. 282 312401/B . Note If you try to make changes without having inserted the right password the system will automatically request it. The following access levels are available: • Monitoring: Only for viewing information. Access automatically expires after 30 minutes • Commissioning: Allows changing of alarm limits. tag description. Note Do not leave the system with a high password access as this allows unauthorized access to vital system functions. alarm groups and enabling/disabling of alarms. Access automatically expires after 30 minutes. The access control system is based on the use of passwords. • User: Allows (system) the operator to push sound off. alarm delays. event limits. • Superuser: Allows the operator to turn the Bridge Watch Monitoring System ON/OFF.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 8. Process Control System 8 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES.3 OS operational procedures 8.1 How to operate a pump starter Pump starter functions To control pumps the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation.2 About the Process Control System The following types of equipment can be controlled by the K-Chief 500 Process Control System: • Pumps • Fans • Compressors • Valves • PID controllers 8.Operational procedures. The following subjects are covered: • Operator Station process control • Midi Operator Station process control 8. allowing the system to record time of starting. It is intended for personnel familiar with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this manual.1 Overview This chapter explains how to use the process control system of the K-Chief 500 system. running and stopping 312401/B 283 .3.

The operator can differ the symbols by clicking on the pump symbol to open the dialogue box. two speed pump at low speed One way. one speed pump One way. one speed pump if it is going forward. Some system configurations have also text under the symbol which state what kind of pump it is The symbol for the two way . In the dialogue box it is written what kind of pump it is. Underneath is a figure illustrating the change in the symbol. as shown below.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Pump starter types The following types of pumps can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in the same direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Pump symbols Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps. one speed pump may look the same as the symbol for the two way. two speed pump at high speed Pumps going revers Note If the pump is a two way pump. one speed pump changes when it is sat to revers. 284 312401/B . And if it is for instance a two way pump. The symbol for the one way. One way. the dialogue box has radio buttons for revers and forward. the symbol arrow will change direction when it is sat to revers.

Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed pumps only: • Arrow fill green: Full speed • Arrow outline green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands.not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Parameters Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. Process Control System Pump symbol colours Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. 312401/B 285 .Operational procedures.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and event enable Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero. the starter will lose the remote signal. Blackout Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes. If the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it is running. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. In this way the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information. and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. • Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped • Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. To solve this set the delay to Off at the running and remote feedback. Single acting control A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. one speed units only. and the delay to On for the system blackout signal. This functionality applies to one way. The following conditions will result in alarms. and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. and the starter will be set to manual: • Trip • Start failure • Stop failure • Started without commanded Modes The starter can be operated in two different modes. On a blackout. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local. 286 312401/B . auto and manual.

or they can be controlled from the other displays where they also are located. and click with the left button on the main group called: Pumps & Fans. • A display similar to the one underneath will be opened.) Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: Pumps & Fans. It is possible to control the pumps and fans in this display. • This button opens the Navigator image. (The name of the main group may vary according to the configuration. point. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. vary according to the configuration.Operational procedures. Process Control System Figure 120 Blackout sequence as described above How to open the Pumps & Fans display The Pumps & Fans display has a viewing of the most used pumps and fans in the system. and the number of pumps and fans in a system. 1 Push the HOME button. 3 312401/B 287 . 2 Use the trackball . Where the pumps and fans can be found.

More functions are then displayed. • The pump symbol changes colour to grey. Note Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened. How to start a pump 1 Open the display showing the pump and click on it. Click on the STOP softbutton. click on the expand softbutton: 288 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Note The pumps may also be controlled on other displays where they also are located. How to stop a pump 1 2 Open the display showing the pump and click on it. To get access to the functions. 2 Click on the START softbutton. • The pump symbol changes colour to green.

Open the display showing the pump. Rectify the problem. Click on the expand softbutton. Note When changing direction the pump will stop. to get access to more functions Choose the wanted direction by clicking in the check box. Choose the wanted speed by clicking in the check box. 1 2 3 Push on the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. How to reset a pump The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure.Operational procedures. and start in the reverse direction after a delay. Process Control System How to change the speed of a pump 1 Open the display showing the pump and click on it. 312401/B 289 . The delay is configurable. Click on the START softbutton How to change the direction of a pump 1 2 3 Open the display showing the pump and click on it. 2 3 4 Click on the expand softbutton to make the rest of the options available. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened.

When two pumps have the same stand-by number. 290 312401/B . The running pump do not need to have the lowest number. both will start simultaneously. The one with the lowest number first. 5 6 Click on the expand softbutton.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the pump you want to reset. The priority number defines which pump will start first. If no pump is running. Stand-by pump systems A stand-by system includes a pump symbol for each stand-by pump. and click on it. to get access to the reset function Click on the RESETsoftbutton. the pump with the lowest number will start at group start. • The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey. • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath will be opened. • The pump is selected and the circle around the pump starts flashing.

Move the cursor over the stand-by pumps controller symbol. • The text background starts flashing. • Manual: The stand-by pump system is disabled. To get access to the functions. Process Control System Figure 121 Symbol for stand-by pump system Stand-by system modes The stand-by system can be set to one of two modes: • Auto: For normal stand-by system operation from the Operator Station. Note Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded.Operational procedures. and click on it. • A similar dialogue is shown: 312401/B 291 . • The stand-by pump controller is selected. Pumps can be manually operated. More functions are then displayed. click on the expand softbutton: How to set a pump to auto or manual 1 2 Open the display showing the stand-by pumps.

for all the pumps. 292 312401/B . • The pump is selected. 3 Click AUTO. and click on it. • The text background starts flashing. Do the following: 1 2 Select the display showing the stand-by pumps. Click on the START softbutton. • The controller changes between auto and manual. • The text background turns green and the text changes to AUTO. and click on it. 6 7 When all pumps are set to auto. How to start a stand-by pump system To operate a pump system in stand-by mode both the pump controller for each of the pumps and the controller for the stand-by system must be set to auto. • The pump status changes to AUTO. • The pump status changes to Running. move the cursor over the pump you want to start. The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual). and click on them. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. • The pump symbol turns green. auto. Then one of the pumps must be started. 4 Move the cursor over each of the pumps in the pump system. 5 Click on the AUTO softbutton. Move the cursor over the stand-by pump controller symbol.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Push AUTO/MANUAL. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

• The controller is set to manual. • The stand-by pump controller is selected. Move the cursor over the stand-by pumps controller symbol. • The pump symbol turns grey. Process Control System How to stop a stand-by pump system This procedure shows you how to take a pump system out of stand-by mode. 6 Click on the STOP softbutton. • The dialogue may look similar to the one underneath: 5 If the pump shall stop running. 3 4 Click on the expand softbutton. How to take a pump out of the stand-by system To take a pump out of the stand-by system. to get access to the reset function Click on the MANUAL softbutton. 312401/B 293 . manual.Operational procedures. 1 2 Open the display showing the stand-by pumps. • The pump is selected. and click on it. • The text background starts flashing. • The text background turns grey. set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required. • The circle around the pump starts flashing. • The pump status changes to Ready to start. and click. set the pump to manual. remote CTRL. move the cursor over it.

How to set stand-by priority A stand-by pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 2 Open the display showing the stand-by pumps. 4 If the pump do not start. • The failing pump goes to MANUAL. It will keep on running or stop. • If the pump shall stop. 4 If you need to stop the pump. • The pump status changes to AUTO. remote CTRL. and click on it. • The pump is selected. 3 Click on the MANUAL softbutton. • The pump is selected. 1 2 Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. indicating a drop in pressure. • The pump symbol turns grey. How to handle a failure to a running pump Pump failures are detected through a drop in pressure. click on the manual softbutton. Move the cursor over the pump. • The 1st stand-by pump starts. manual. How to put a pump back into the stand-by system 1 2 Open the display showing the stand-by pumps. click on the STOP softbutton. dependent on how the system is configured. and click on it. • The circle around the pump starts flashing. • The pressure indicator turns red. • The pump status changes to Ready to start. click on the START softbutton. Move the cursor over the pump. This procedure shows how to set stand-by priority to a pump system with three pumps. 294 312401/B . Rectify the problem. 3 Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.

6 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as next stand-by. • The pump is selected. Process Control System 1 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as master. • The circle around the pump starts flashing.2 How to operate a fan starter Fan starter functions To control fans the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto & manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch or blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamp on every change of operation. 4 Move the cursor over the pump you want to set as first stand-by. Click on the Master softbutton. • The circle around the pump starts flashing. • The text changes to stand-by (2). 8. • The text changes to stand-by (3). • The circle around the pump starts flashing. • The pump is selected. • The pump is selected. and click on it. 5 Click on the 1st stand-by softbutton. 7 Click on the Next stand-by softbutton. to get access to all the functions. running and stopping 312401/B 295 .3. allowing the system to record time of starting. and click on it.Operational procedures. 2 3 Click on the expand softbutton. • The text changes to stand-by (1).

one speed fan if it is going forward. The operator can differ the symbols by clicking on the fan symbol to open the dialogue box. two speed fan at high speed Fans going revers Note If the fan is a two way fan.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Fan starter types The following types of starters can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in one direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Fan symbols Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans. Underneath is a figure illustrating the change in the symbol. The symbol for the one way. as shown below. the dialogue box has radio buttons for Exhaust (revers) and Supply (forward). 296 312401/B . one speed fan changes when it is sat to Exhaust (revers). two speed fan at low speed One way. In the dialogue box it is written what kind of fan it is. One way. the symbol inside the circle (of the symbol) will change direction when it is sat to Exhaust. one speed fan One way. Some system configurations have also text under the symbol which state what kind of fan it is The symbol for the two way . one speed fan may look the same as the symbol for the two way. And if it is for instance a two way fan.

• The circle around the fan starts flashing.not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid How to start a fan 1 2 Open the display showing the fan. • The fan is selected. • A dialogue similar to the one underneath is opened. Process Control System Fan symbol colours Fan symbols have colours according to the state they are in. and click on it.Operational procedures. Move the cursor over the fan. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed fans only: • Shape fill green: Full speed • Shape outline green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . 312401/B 297 .

1 2 3 4 Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. • The fan is selected. • The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey. How to stop a fan 1 2 Open the display showing the fan. to get access to all the functions. Move the cursor over the fan. 3 Click on the STOP softbutton. Rectify the problem.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Click on the START softbutton. Move the cursor over the fan you want to reset. and click on it. or as the result of a start failure. • The fan is selected. How to reset a fan The fan logic must be reset when the fan has tripped. 5 6 Click on the expand softbutton. • The fan symbol turns green. Open the display showing the fan. • The circle around the fan starts flashing. if any. 298 312401/B . • The circle around the fan starts flashing. • The fan symbol turns grey. and click on it. Click on the RESET softbutton.

The figure below describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal. The following functions are handled: Compressor starter functions To control the compressor the following functions and features are available: • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation.3 How to operate a compressor Purpose The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system.3. Figure 122 sensor A 2-compressor system with common pressure The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Process Control System 8. running and stopping Compressor control types Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure 312401/B 299 . allowing the system to record time of starting. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors.Operational procedures.

not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Leader follower compressor system A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop Compressor symbol To illustrate a compressor the following symbol is used: Figure 123 Compressor symbol Compressor symbol colours The compressor symbol has colours according to the state it is in. (It has also a symbol which shows if it is in auto or manual. Arrow colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local .) The compressor symbol is displayed above. 300 312401/B .

The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. For systems with analogue pressure sensors. and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit. a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when the time has expired.Operational procedures. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. Start 312401/B 301 . Start/stop conditions Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters. Pressure tags Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows: • Leader • 1st follower • 2nd follower • 3rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. The start setting for the 1st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting. Process Control System Figure 124 Leader follower compressor system Priorities For automatic operation the compressor starter must be set to auto mode.

each priority has separate stop settings. or individual. Leader control The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked. Start conditions are: • Pressure lower than the start limit. Stop conditions are: • Pressure higher than the stop limit • Stop leader signal is active • High-high pressure Auto Two modes exist. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting. Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired. A common stop sensor can also be used. In the following different examples for start and stop conditions are given. or in any way disabled from operating. • When a compressor is starting. separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. When analogue pressure sensors are used. Stop The stop limit can be the same for all compressors. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. 302 312401/B . auto and manual. and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting. When binary pressure sensors are used. Figure 125 Leader start stop limit Start follower on pressure drop Each priority has its own start and stop settings.

There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor. 312401/B 303 . the third follower will start immediately. The timer is started when the 2nd follower meets its start conditions. the third follower will start after a time delay. The 2nd and 3rd followers will start in similar ways.principle diagram In the illustration below.Operational procedures. Figure 128 Start follower after a time delay . If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired. Process Control System Figure 126 Start 1st follower on pressure setting Figure 127 Start two followers on pressure setting Start follower after a time delay The 1st follower can start on its own pressure setting. or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor.

The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. If the first follower meets its own start condition (before the delay has expired). and count the time from this event. Figure 130 Followers start timers In the illustration bellow. If the first and the second compressor does not start on their own start settings. the second and third followers will reset their timers. Figure 131 Interrupted start timer Built in hysteresis This function operates using two pressure switches: • The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch • The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch 304 312401/B . the third follower is started 3 times. start delay after the leader had its start condition.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 129 Start followers after a time delay The followers are started on timer. the followers are started after time delays.

How to set a compressor system to auto or manual mode A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes: 312401/B 305 . Process Control System Figure 132 Built in hysteresis By adjusting the pressure switches differently. • Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to “out of service”. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit. Two analogue pressures In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. Figure 133 Two analogue pressures Overhaul function Two reservoir system have an overhaul function. the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other. Different configurations are available as required by the customer. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: • Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors.Operational procedures.

Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. • The text background starts flashing. Move the cursor over the auto/manual controller symbol. and click on it. • The compressor controller is selected. 1 2 Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system. and click on it. 1 2 Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system. the compressor will not start. Move the cursor over the leader follower compressor controller symbol. 3 Click on the AUTO softbutton. 306 312401/B . • The text background starts flashing. Then one of the compressors must be started. 3 Click on the AUTO or the MANUAL softbutton.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Operator Station. and click on it. • The controller is selected. • The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual). • The controller changes between auto and manual. • The compressor is selected. 4 Move the cursor over each of the compressors in the leader follower system. How to start a leader follower compressor system To operate a leader follower compressor system in stand-by mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto. Note When the pressure is higher than the stop limit. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing. • The text background turns green and the text changes to auto.

remote CTRL. • The button status changes to Running. • The compressor status changes to auto. and click on it. 3 Click on the MANUAL softbutton. and click on it. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing. • The compressor is selected. • The compressor status changes to Ready to start. move the cursor over it and click. When all of the compressors are set to auto. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing. • The compressor symbol turns grey. • The text background starts flashing. 312401/B 307 . set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required. auto. Process Control System 5 Click on the AUTO softbutton. move the cursor to the compressor you want to start. 8 9 Click on the AUTO softbutton. • The controller is set to manual. 6 7 Do the procedure from item 4 to 5 for each of the compressors.Operational procedures. • The compressor is selected. How to stop a leader follower compressor system To take a leader follower compressor system out of stand-by mode. Click on the START softbutton to start the compressor. 4 To stop the running compressor. 1 2 Open the display showing the leader follower compressor system. • The controller is selected. 10 Click on the AUTO softbutton. 5 Click on the STOP softbutton. remote CTRL. Move the cursor over the controller symbol. manual.

1 2 3 Push on the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. Open the display showing the compressor. and click on it. Rectify the problem. • The text changes to follower. (In this procedure the system consist of three compressors) 1 2 Select the mimic display showing the leader follower compressor system. and click on it. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing. • The compressor is selected. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing. Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as leader. 6 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the second follower. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to set the leader follower priority A stand-by compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. • The text changes to leader. 3 Click on the Master softbutton. 308 312401/B . How to reset compressors The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure. and click on it. • The compressor is selected. • The compressor is selected. 7 Click on the Next standby softbutton. 4 Move the cursor over the compressor you want to set as the first follower. • The text changes to follower (2). 5 Click on the 1st standby softbutton.

Operational procedures. only single acting control • Double acting: Two relays for control • Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback • Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks 312401/B 309 . 8. Process Control System 4 Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset. • The circle around the compressor starts flashing. allowing the system to record time of positioning Valve control types The valve control can operate the following types of configurations: On-off valves • Single acting: One relay for control • Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback • Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks • Single acting with no feedback: No feedback. 5 Click on the RESET softbutton. and click on it.4 How to operate valves Valve control functions The following functions and features are available: • Monitoring of the controlled valve • Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback • Blocking from opening • Blocking from closing • Blocking from operation (local control) • Deviation monitoring • Update alarm status • Update event status • Optional time stamp on every change of operation. • The compressor is selected.3. • The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey.

one binary feedbacks • Two feedbacks: No control.not ready • Orange: Invalid 310 312401/B . two binary feedbacks Valve symbols Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Double acting with no feedback: No feedback. and no relay or other control is provided. Underneath is two examples: Figure 134 Valve symbol (example 1) Figure 135 Valve symbol (example 2) Valve symbol colours Valve symbols have colours according to the state they are in. • One feedback: No control. Single and double acting valves • Green: Open • Grey: Closed • Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . only double acting control Analogue positioning valves • Analogue out: Step-less positioning • Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback • Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning • Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback • Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks. Monitoring Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner.

and click on it. Note Some of the dialogue boxes can be expanded. • The tag. click on the expand softbutton: 312401/B 311 .not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. How to open on-off valves 1 2 Open the display showing the valve. To get access to the functions.when not reaching the end position or setpoint. • The current status and the new command is displayed. 3 Click on the OPEN softbutton. • The symbol colour changes to green. More functions are then displayed. valves will give an alarm on time-out . • The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed in a dialogue.Operational procedures. Note As a default. Process Control System Throttle valves • Green: Feedback at set point • Grey: Closed/stopped • Yellow: Feedback outside dead band • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local .

and click on it. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. and click on it. 100 %. • The equipment is selected.0 %): is displayed in a dialogue. use the trackball and click on the OPEN softbutton. How to operate throttle valves 1 2 Open the display showing the valve. The tag. fully closed. tag description and the current state of the valve is displayed in a dialogue. • The valve is selected. • The status changes. 3 Click on the CLOSE softbutton. Open valve to 100 % 3 To open the valve to 100 %. fully open). • The symbol colour is flashing to indicate that it is selected. • The text Enter new setpoint (0. 312 312401/B . 3 4 Type in the new setpoint. How to operate analogue valves 1 2 Open the display showing the valve. and click on it. Push ENTER. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. • The current status and the new command is displayed. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate.0-100. • The valve setpoint is changed. (0 %. • The symbol colour changes to grey. first to opening then to opened.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to close on-off valves 1 2 Open the display showing the valve.

Push ENTER. 312401/B 313 . • The setpoint changes. • The symbol is flashing to indicate that it is selected. pressure controlled valves. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves. • The symbol colour changes to grey.Operational procedures. • The menu buttons changes to increase and decrease. use the trackball and click in the Throttle mode check box. Throttle mode 5 To set the setpoint to a value between 0 and 100 %. How to reset valves Resetting of valves is required on time-out. • The valve is selected. Process Control System Close valve to 0 % 4 To close the valve to 0 %.5 How to operate a PID controller PID controller symbol The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. • The status changes. use the trackball and click on the CLOSE softbutton.3. frequency controlled pumps etc. 6 7 8 Move the cursor over the Increase or Decrease softbutton. tag description and the current status of the valve is displayed in a dialogue. and click on it. 3 Click on the RESET softbutton. first to closing then to closed. The tag. and click on it. Type in the new setpoint value. 8. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to operate. 1 2 Open the display showing the valve.

The controller operates when active.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 136 PID controller The controller can operate in two modes: • Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. • Deactive (off): The PID controller does not control the process. manual valve positioning is possible. Figure 137 PID controller symbol PID controller symbol colours • Green: Active • Blue: Blocked or configuration fail • Grey: Deactive • Red: Alarm • Orange: Invalid 314 312401/B . If the controller operates on an actuator.

Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint. • The Active circle turns green. DEACT. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. 4 5 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed. 3 Click and enter a new setpoint in the dialogue . 312401/B 315 . • A dialogue box similar to the one underneath is opened: 2 Click on the ON softbutton.. • The new process setpoint is displayed. • The PID controller is selected. A flashing yellow square is displayed around the controller. Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate.Operational procedures. • The prompt ACT. and click on it. field. Process Control System How to select a PID controller 1 2 Open the display showing the PID controller. A setpoint command is sent to the controller. Figure 138 Symbol for an active PID controller How to activate the controller 1 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and click on it. Push ENTER.

Figure 139 PID controller symbol (not active) 8. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed. field. 4 5 Type in the new value using the numeric keyboard. • The Active circle turns grey. DEACT. but is showing N/A in the Setp.4 MOS operational procedures Note An access control system limits the possibility to acknowledge alarms and change system parameters to those who have the right password. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner. 3 Click and enter a new actuator setpoint. • The new actuator setpoint is displayed.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to deactivate the controller 1 2 Move the cursor over the symbol for the PID controller you want to operate and cick on it. 316 312401/B . • The prompt ACT.. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. or Enter New PROCESS setpoint is displayed. Click on the STOP softbutton. Note You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value. Push ENTER.

Underneath is a list of groups and its number in parenthesis: • Pumps (1) • Compressors (2) • Valves (3) • Controllers (4) • Stand-by sets (5) Note 2 3 The contents of the list above may vary depending on the system configuration.Operational procedures.1 How to open Tag overview The Tag overview is a list where you can select the display picture you want to open. Push 1 to display the Control Menu. 4 Use the top and bottom of the navigator key to mark the wanted group. Process Control System 8.4. Push 2 to display the Tag Selection Menu. 8. Then push enter to select it.4.2 How to operate a pump starter Pump starter functions To control pumps the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout 312401/B 317 . The display pictures are available for all controlled units. The list of groups may vary according to the system configuration. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. • A list of alternatives are displayed. It is also possible to select a group by using the numeric keys. 1 Push Menu to display the main menu.

two speed pump going forward at high speed 318 312401/B . running and stopping Pump starter types The following types of pumps can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in the same direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Pump symbols Different pump symbols are used to indicate different types of pumps. two speed pump at low speed One way. as shown below. One way. allowing the system to record time of starting. one speed pump going forward Two way. two speed pump at high speed Two way. two speed pump going forward at low speed Two way.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Blocking from operation when Local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation. one speed pump going in reverse Two way. one speed pump One way.

Stopped time: Stand still time when changing speed with stop pulse 312401/B 319 .not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Parameters Timeout: Time out for start and stop commands. Pulse on: Pulse duration for start and stop commands. Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed pumps only: • Arrow fill green: Full speed • Arrow half filled green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . Process Control System Two way. two speed pump going in reverse at low speed Two way.Operational procedures. Blackout restart time: The time the equipment is blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. Wait change direction: Wait time when changing speed direction. two speed pump going in reverse at high speed Pump symbol colours Pump symbols have colours according to the state they are in.

The relay is closed as long as the unit is meant to be running. Blackout Some equipment starters (provided by some manufacturers) have the local/remote switch connected serially with the power failure switch. the starter will lose the remote signal. at the running and remote feedback. If the controlled unit does not include a sensor to know if it is running. The following conditions will result in alarms. and the Ondelay. Some alarms must be enabled at all times due to classification society requirements. To solve this set the Offdelay. auto and manual. The function is activated when the timer is set to a value larger than zero. Single acting control A relay is used to start and stop the controlled unit. • Auto: A unit can be automatically started and stopped • Manual: Only manual start and stop is possible Restart after blackout applies to both auto and manual modes. and that the remote signal is back before the starter receives recover from blackout. and opened when the unit is meant to be stopped. The shut down and start block functions are active both in auto and manual modes. Start fail and trip alarms are among these. On a blackout. and the blackout detector is referred to by the tag reference. In this way the event information sent from the starter includes the current running information. This functionality applies to one way. one speed units only. the starter will generate the feedback signal internally. It is important that the starter detects the blackout before it is set to local.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Alarm and event enable Parameters for enabling and disabling alarms and events are available. for the system blackout signal. 320 312401/B . and the starter will be set to manual: • Trip • Start failure • Stop failure • Started without commanded Modes The starter can be operated in two different modes.

Push the function key for the function you want.) Push the function key for STOP. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. • The pump status changes to Running.) Push the function key for START. remote. 2 3 Typical control texts: 312401/B 321 . • The pump status changes to Ready.) You may need to use the page down or page up keys to gain access to the function keys you need. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. • The pump symbol turns grey. the text for the function keys may vary 1 Select the pump in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. 2 How to stop a one way one speed pump 1 Select the pump in the Tag Overview. Process Control System Figure 140 Blackout sequence as described above How to start a one way one speed pump 1 Select the pump in the Tag Overview. 2 How to operate a two way and to speed pump Note Depending on the system configuration. • The pump symbol turns green.Operational procedures.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Start Low Forward • Start High Forward • Start Low Revers • Start High Revers • Stop Note When changing direction the pump will stop. Push the function key for RESET. The running pump do not need to have the lowest number. 322 312401/B . 1 2 3 4 5 Push the Sound off button to turn the audible alarm off. The pump logic must be reset when the pump has tripped or as the result of a start failure. • The circle around the pump symbol changes from red to grey. How to reset a pump Note This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled to the Midi Operator Station. The delay is configurable. The priority number defines which pump will start first. and the one with the lowest number is first. If no pump is running. Select the display showing the pump. Rectify the problem. Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. the pump with the lowest number will start at group start. Stand-by pump systems A stand-by system includes a pump symbol for each stand-by pump. both will start simultaneously. When two pumps have the same stand-by number. and start in the reverse direction after a delay.

Do the following: 312401/B 323 . (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. must be set to auto. Process Control System Figure 141 Symbol for a stand-by pump system Stand-by system modes The stand-by system have two modes: • Auto: For normal stand-by system operation from the Midi Operator Station.) Push the function key for Auto or Manual. • Manual: The stand-by pump system is disabled. How to set the mode 1 Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. • The mode indicator changes between auto and manual.Operational procedures. 2 How to start a stand-by pump system To operate a pump system in stand-by mode. Pumps can be manually operated. both the pump controller for each of the pumps and the controller for the stand-by system. Then one of the pumps must be started. The ring around the pump symbol and the background colour for the mode indicator changes between yellow (auto) and grey (manual). for more details on how to open the Tag overview.

How to stop a stand-by pump system To take a pump system out of stand-by mode.) Use the navigator key to select each of the pumps. • A white square is displayed around the pump. 8 Use the navigator key to select the pump you want to start. 4 Push the function key for AUTO.) The stand-by pump system is set to AUTO. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Auto. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns green and the text changes to Auto. 9 Push the ENTER button. 10 Push the function key for START. • The pump starts. • The pump is displayed. 324 312401/B . • The display returns to the stand-by pump system display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. 6 7 Select each of the remaining pumps and set them to AUTO. one at a time. • The pump is displayed. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 5. 5 Push the ESC button. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. set the pump controller to manual and stop the running pump if required. 2 3 Push the ENTER button.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. • The ring around the pump symbol changes to yellow.

• The stand-by pump system is set to Manual. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit. push the function key for MANUAL. • The pump is displayed. Process Control System 1 Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. 1 Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator grey and the text changes to Manual. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. 2 To stop the running pump do the following: 3 Use the navigator key to select the pump you want to stop. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit. • The pump stops. 4 Push the ENTER button. set the pump to manual. • The stand-by pump system controller is set to Manual. 4 Push the ENTER button. 2 If the pump system consists of only two pumps.Operational procedures. Push the function key for MANUAL. Otherwise go to step 3. the stand-by functionality can not be maintained. How to take a pump out of the stand-by system To take a pump out of the stand-by system. 312401/B 325 .). 5 Push the function key for STOP.) • If the stand-by pump system consists of only two pumps. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. • The pump is displayed. 3 Use the navigator key to select the pump.

• The 1st stand-by pump starts. • The failing pump goes to manual. depending on how the system is configured. • The pressure indicator turns yellow.). • The pump controller for this pump is set to Manual. • The display returns to the stand-by pump system. 2 3 Push the ENTER button.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 Push the function key for MANUAL. 6 Push the ESC button. 5 Push the ESC button. • The pump symbol is grey. indicating a drop in pressure. • The pump is displayed. Pump failures are detected through a drop in pressure. It will keep on running or stop. How to put a pump back into the stand-by system 1 Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. How to handle a failure to a running pump Note This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled on the Midi Operator Station. • The display returns to the stand-by system display. 4 Push the function key for AUTO. • The ring around the pump symbol turns yellow. 326 312401/B . for more details on how to open the Tag overview. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit. Use the navigator key to select the pump. • The pump controller for this pump is set to Auto.

2 5 8. normally 2 or 3. Select and set the priority for each pump as described above. • The number of priorities depends on the number of pumps. until all priorities are set. Push the corresponding function key to set the priority of the pump. to return to the stand-by pump system display. How to set stand-by priority A stand-by pump system will normally consist of two or three pumps.3 How to operate a fan starter Fan starter functions To control fans the following functions and features are available: • Start and stop sequence for two speeds and two different directions • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded 312401/B 327 .Operational procedures. Rectify the problem. Use the navigator key to select each of the pumps. Process Control System 1 2 Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. 1 Select the stand-by pump in the Tag Overview display (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. for more details on how to open the Tag overview).4. 6 7 Push the ESC button. 3 Push ENTER to select it. • A white square is displayed around the pump. 4 You may need to use the page down or page up keys to gain access to the function keys you need. • The pump is displayed. to set their priority. one at a time.

two speed fan going forward at low speed 328 312401/B . allowing the system to record time of starting. two speed fan at high speed Two way. one speed fan One way. running and stopping Fan starter types The following types of starters can be operated: • Single speed: One speed control in one direction • Two speed: Two speed in one direction • Two directional: One speed in two directions • All speed: Two speed in two directions • Single acting: One speed with steady relay control Fan symbols Different fan symbols are used to indicate different types of fans.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Auto & manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when Local switch or blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamp on every change of operation. one speed fan going in reverse Two way. one speed fan going forward Two way. two speed fan at low speed One way. One way.

not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid How to start a fan 1 Select the fan in the Tag overview display. two speed fan going forward at high speed Two way. • The fan symbol turns green. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. Process Control System Two way.Operational procedures. 2 312401/B 329 . Arrow outline colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Arrow fill colour For two-speed fans only: • Shape fill green: Full speed • Shape half filled green: Low speed Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . • The fan status changes to Running. two speed fan going in reverse at low speed Two way. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317.) Push the function key for START. two speed fan going in reverse at high speed Fan symbol colours Fan symbols have colours according to the state they are in.

4. remote. 2 How to reset a fan Note This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled on the Midi Operator Station. The fan logic must be reset when the fan has tripped.4 How to operate a compressor Purpose The main purpose of the compressor starter is to control the compressors in a compressed air system. • The fan symbol turns grey • The fan status changes to Ready.) Push the function key for STOP. 1 2 3 4 5 Push the sound off button to turn of the audible alarm. or as the result of a start failure. • The circle around the fan symbol changes from red to grey. The compressor starter provides automatic start on low pressure and stop on high pressure. Open the display showing the fan. Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. Push the function key for RESET. 330 312401/B . The figure below describes a compressor system with one common analogue pressure signal. 8. The compressed air system may include one or more compressors with analogue or binary pressure sensors. for more details on how to open the Tag overview.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to stop a fan 1 Select the fan in the Tag overview display. Rectify the problem. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317.

The following functions are handled: Compressor starter functions To control the compressor the following functions and features are available: • Alarm reporting for start and stop failure • Alarm reporting for tripping or started without commanded • Auto and manual control • Automatic time delayed restart when recovering from blackout • Blocking from operation when local switch is active or during blackout • Automatic shut down • Optional time stamping of every change of operation.Operational procedures. allowing the system to record time of starting. running and stopping Compressor control types Analogue pressure 1: One analogue pressure Analogue pressure 2: Two analogue pressures Binary pressure with hysteresis: Pressure switches with built in hysteresis Binary pressure without hysteresis: Separate pressure switches for start and stop Compressor symbols Compressors have the following symbol. Process Control System Figure 142 sensor A 2-compressor system with common pressure The compressor starter monitors pressure and running signals. Compressors are started if the pressure is lower than the set limit and stopped if it is higher. 312401/B 331 .

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 143 Compressor symbol Compressor symbol colours The compressor symbols have colour according to the state they are in.not ready • Yellow: Stand-by • Orange: Invalid Leader follower compressor system A leader follower compressor system includes a symbol for each compressor. Arrow colour • Green: Running • Grey: Stopped Circle colour • Green: Running and remote • Grey: Stopped and remote • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . Figure 144 Leader follower compressor system Priorities For automatic operation the compressor starter must be set to auto mode. The compressor starter assigns different start and stop priorities as follows: 332 312401/B .

a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when this timer has expired. The priority defines in which order the compressors will start and stop. Wait pressure at start: When a compressor is starting. When analogue pressure sensors are used. Stop conditions are: • Pressure higher than the stop limit 312401/B 333 . For systems with analogue pressure sensors. all followers are stopped when reaching the alarm high high limit. or individual. Pressure parameters Command timeout: The time the starter will wait before signalling command timeout. separate sensors can be used to define the stop limit for each priority. When binary pressure sensors are used.Operational procedures. Start/stop conditions Start and stop conditions are adjustable by changing parameters. • When a compressor is starting. Stop The stop limit can be the same for all compressors. Process Control System • Leader • 1st follower • 2nd follower • 3rd follower A compressor can only have one priority at a time. and the stop setting for the first follower must be lower or equal to the leader stop setting. All followers are stopped when the leader stop setting is reached. A common stop sensor can also be used. each priority has separate stop settings. Pressure filter: The length of time the pressure may stay below the start limit before the compressor is started. Start Systems using both binary and analogue pressure sensors have separate start settings for each priority. All priorities are stopped by the stop leader setting. Blackout recover: The time the compressors are blocked from auto restarting after a blackout. The start setting for the 1st follower must be lower or equal to the leader start setting. a new compressor is started if the pressure has not increased to above the start limit when a set time has expired. Start conditions are: • Pressure lower than the start limit.

Leader control The leader compressor has its own start and stop limits. A compressor set to a priority will start when the pressure lowers below its start setting. and stop when the pressure rises above its stop setting. Figure 146 Start 1st follower on pressure setting Figure 147 Start two followers on pressure setting Start follower after a time delay 334 312401/B . Select auto mode to set the compressor automation functionality in operation. Auto mode operation requires that the starter is not blocked. or in any way disabled from operating. In the following different examples for start and stop conditions are given. auto and manual. Figure 145 Leader start stop limit Start follower on pressure drop Each priority has its own start and stop settings.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Stop leader signal is active • High-high pressure Auto Two modes exist.

The timer is started when the 2nd follower meets its start conditions. start delay after the leader had its start condition. Figure 148 Start follower after a time delay . If the pressure falls below third followers start conditions before the timer has expired.Operational procedures. the third follower is started 3 times. or a time delay after a start condition for the leader compressor. There is no delayed start on the start conditions for the topping up compressor.principle diagram In the illustration below. Figure 149 Start followers after a time delay The followers are started on timer. The timer is started when the leader has start conditions. the third follower will start after a time delay. Figure 150 Followers start timers 312401/B 335 . If the first and the second compressor does not start on their own start settings. The 2nd and 3rd followers will start in similar ways. the third follower will start immediately. Process Control System The 1st follower can start on its own pressure setting.

Two analogue pressures In two reservoir systems the compressors are started when one of the pressure sensors indicate below the start limit. The delay starts when the leader meets its start conditions. the second and third followers will reset their timers. Figure 151 Interrupted start timer Built in hysteresis This function operates using two pressure switches: • The leader will start and stop based on the high pressure switch • The follower will start and stop in correspondence with the state of the low pressure switch Figure 152 Built in hysteresis By adjusting the pressure switches differently.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 In the illustration bellow. The compressors are stopped when both of the pressure sensors increase above the stop limit. 336 312401/B . the followers are started after time delays. the two compressors will function as a pair where one starts before the other. and count the time from this event. If the first follower meets its own start condition (before the delay has expired).

• Set a button in the mimic or physical switch on the equipment to “out of service”. How to start a leader follower compressor system 2 To operate a leader follower compressor system in stand-by mode the compressor controller and each of the compressors must be set to auto.) Push the function key for AUTO or MANUAL. There are two ways of setting a reservoir to overhaul: • Set the pressure sensors belonging to the reservoir to off scan. • The controller text changes between auto and manual. Manual: The leader follower system can only be operated locally from the starter cabinet. 1 Select the leader follower compressor in the Tag Overview display. 312401/B 337 .Operational procedures. Different configurations are available as required by the customer. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. The text background changes between green (auto) and grey (manual). Process Control System Figure 153 Two analogue pressures Overhaul function Two reservoirs system have an overhaul function. The sensor is not included when checking the auto start and stop limits for the compressors. That is when one of the reservoirs is disabled from being part of the auto start and stop logic. How to set a compressor system to auto and manual mode A leader follower compressor system can be set to one of two modes: Auto: For normal leader follower system operation from the Operator Station.

1 Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. 5 Push the ESC button. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit. 3 Push the ENTER button. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns green and the text changes to Auto. Push the function key for AUTO. one at a time. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. set the compressor controller to manual and stop the running compressor if required. • The stand-by compressor system is set to Auto. • The compressor is displayed.) Use the navigator key to select each of the compressors. • The ring around the compressor symbol changes to yellow. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 5) Return to the compressor system display. the compressor will not start. 338 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Note When the pressure is higher than the stop limit. How to stop a leader follower compressor system 2 To take a leader follower compressor system out of stand-by mode. • The display returns to the compressor system display. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. 6 7 8 Select each of the remaining compressors and set them to auto. 4 Push the function key for AUTO. • The compressor controller for this compressor is set to Auto.

5 Push the function key for STOP. • The compressor is displayed. 2 Do the following to stop the running compressor: 3 Use the navigator key to select the compressor. normally 2 or 3. one at a time. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. Process Control System 1 Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. • A white square is displayed around the selected unit. 2 312401/B 339 . (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. How to set leader follower priority A leader follower compressor system will normally consist of two or three compressors. 3 Push the ENTER button.) Push the function key for MANUAL. • The text background for the auto/manual mode indicator turns grey and the text changes to Manual.) Use the navigator key to select each of the compressors. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. 4 5 Push the page down key. Push the corresponding function key to set this compressors priority. to set their priority • A white square is displayed around the selected unit.Operational procedures. • The compressor is stopped. 4 Push the ENTER button. • The compressor is displayed. • The stand-by compressor system is set to Manual. • The number of priorities depend on the number of compressors. 1 Select the compressor system in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317.

1 2 3 4 5 6 Push the sound off button to turn the audible alarm off.5 How to operate a valve Valve control functions The following functions and features are available: • Monitoring of the controlled valve • Pulse or analogue control of valves with analogue feedback • Blocking from opening • Blocking from closing • Blocking from operation (local control) • Deviation monitoring • Update alarm status • Update event status 340 312401/B . Select the display showing the compressor. Select each of the remaining compressors until all priorities are set for all of them.4. Move the cursor to the symbol for the compressor you want to reset.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 6 7 Push the ESC button to return to the display. Rectify the problem. Push the function key for RESET. Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm. (Repeat the procedure from item 2 to 6) How to reset a compressor Note This function is only available for small systems where alarms are enabled to the Midi Operator Station. • The circle around the compressor symbol changes from red to grey. 8. The compressor logic must be reset when the compressor has tripped or as the result of a start failure.

only double acting control Analogue positioning valves • Analogue out: Step-less positioning – Analogue out with analogue feedback: Step-less control with analogue feedback • Double acting positioning: Pulsed positioning – Double acting with analogue feedback: Pulsed positioning with analogue valve feedback – Double acting with one analogue feedback and two binary feedbacks: Pulsed positioning with one analogue valve feedback and two binary end feedbacks. allowing the system to record time of positioning Valve control types The valve control can operate the following types of configurations: On-off valves • Single acting: One relay for control – Single acting with one feedback: One relay for control and one binary feedback – Single acting with two feedbacks: One relay for control and two binary feedbacks – Single acting with no feedback: No feedback. Monitoring Monitoring is used when only binary feedbacks are interfaced to the positioner.Operational procedures. 312401/B 341 . • One feedback: No control. two binary feedbacks Valve symbols Different valve symbols are used to indicate different types of valves. and no relay or other control is provided. Process Control System • Optional time stamp on every change of operation. only single acting control • Double acting: Two relays for control – Double acting with one feedback: Two relays for control and one binary feedback – Double acting with two feedbacks: Two relays for control and two binary feedbacks – Double acting with no feedback: No feedback. one binary feedback • Two feedbacks: No control.

Note As a default.not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves have set points between 0 and 100 %.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 154 Valve symbol (example 1) Figure 155 Valve symbol (example 2) Valve symbol colours The valve symbols have colour according to the state they are in.not ready • Orange: Invalid Throttle valves • Green: Feedback at set point • Grey: Closed/stopped • Yellow: Feedback outside dead band • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . valves will give an alarm on time-out . Single and double acting valves • Green: Open • Grey: Closed • Yellow: Intermediate (opening or closing) • Blue: Blocked • Red: Alarm • White: Local . 342 312401/B .when not reaching the end position.

• The valve symbol turns green.) Push the function key for OPEN to 100 %. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. Process Control System How to open an on-off valve 1 Select the valve in the Tag Overview display. • The valve setpoint has changed • The valve is repositioned to reach the new setpoint. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. • The valve status changes to Open. • The valve symbol turns grey. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. 5 6 7 Use the CLR key to delete the existing setpoint Type in the new setpoint. • A setpoint input window is displayed.) Push the function key for CLOSE. 312401/B 343 . • The valve status changes to close . Do the following to position the valve to a setpoint: 4 Push the function key for SETPOINT 0-100 %. 2 How to close an on-off valve 1 Select the valve in the Tag Overview display.) Push the function key for OPEN.Operational procedures. 2 How to operate an analogue valve 1 Select the valve in the Tag Overview display. Do the following to open the valve: 2 Do the following to close the valve: 3 Push the function key for CLOSE to 0 %. Push the ENTER button. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317.

4. Figure 156 PID controller The controller can operate in two modes: • Active (on): This is the normal PID controller mode. 344 312401/B . Do the following to reset: 1 2 3 4 5 Push the ACK button to acknowledge the alarm.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to reset a valve Resetting of valves is required on time-out.6 How to operate a PID controller PID controller symbol The PID controller keeps a process signal at a pre-defined value. The controller is used for temperature controlled valves. pressure controlled valves. Rectify the problem. 8. Select the display showing the valve. If the controller operates on an actuator. Push the function key for RESET. • Deactive (off): The PID controller does not control the process. The controller operates when active. • The valve symbol changes from red to grey. manual valve positioning is possible. Move the cursor to the symbol for the valve you want to reset. frequency controlled pumps etc.

4 Use the CLR key to remove the existing setpoint. • A setpoint input window is displayed. 312401/B 345 . field.) Push the function key for ON command. Process Control System Figure 157 PID controller symbol PID controller symbol colours • Green: Active • Blue: Blocked or configuration fail • Grey: Deactive • Red: Alarm • Orange: Invalid How to activate the controller 1 Select the PID controller in the Tag Overview display. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. for more details on how to open the Tag overview. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. 2 3 Push the function key for ACTUATOR SETPOINT to enter a new set point. • The Active circle turns green. The controller setpoint is shown in the Setp. A setpoint command is sent to the controller.Operational procedures.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 6 Type in the new setpoint value.) Push the function key for OFF Command . for more details on how to open the Tag overview. Actuator setpoint is shown both as a percentage and a bar graph. The controller setpoint is no longer displayed. A setpoint command is sent to the positioner. • The Active circle turns grey. but N/A is displayed in the Setp. How to deactivate the controller 1 Select the PID controller in the Tag Overview display. The PID controller adjusts the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the new setpoint. • The new setpoint is displayed. Figure 158 PID controller symbol (not active) 346 312401/B . Push the ENTER button. (See How to open Tag overview on page 317. field. 2 Note You must manually adjust the actuator to make the process feedback equal to the required value.

or stop directly.2 About the Power Management System Change-over functionality Any alarm for the generator set can be configured to have change over functionality. When any of these alarms are given.Operational procedures. Power Management System 9 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES. the 1st to stop generator will disconnect and stop. The failing generator will then unload and disconnect. the 1st standby diesel generator will start and connect. a standby diesel generator starts and connects. the Power Management System gives a “start granted” to the consumer. If it fails to start or connect. the Power Management System will check for available power. It is possible to configure the system to start more than one standby generator on blackout. It is intended for personnel familiar with the “Getting Started” and “Alarm and Monitoring” sections of this manual. Load dependent start and stop of stand-by generators When a high load occurs on the connected generator(s). cool-down and stop. • If enough power is available and a predefined number of generators are connected.1 Overview This chapter teaches you how to use the Power Management System (PMS) of the K-Chief 500 system. Control of heavy consumers start request and start granted When a heavy consumer start request is received. 312401/B 347 . POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 9. the next standby diesel generator will start and connect. Automatic start and connect when blackout occurs When a main switchboard blackout occurs. This is dependent on the configuration. After the generator is disconnected the diesel generator may continue running. the 1st standby generator will start and connect. The following subjects are covered: • Operator Station PMS control • Midi Operator Station PMS control 9. When the load decreases enough to let a generator disconnect without overloading the remaining.

Figure 159 Typical Power Management System Display 348 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • If enough power is not available. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive. a “start granted” is given to the consumer. A typical Power Management System display is shown below.3. When enough power is available. 9. steam turbine or the main engine. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine.1 Overview The Power Management System is mainly operated through a colour display reflecting the ships power distribution system. • When more than one heavy consumer sends a “request for start”. only one is granted at a time. the standby generator(s) will automatically start and connect.3 OS operational procedures 9. The Power Management System remembers all start requests and enables them in sequence.

Click on the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: POWER MAN SYSTEM or PMS.3 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the TCP) 1 Use the fingertip and touch the main group for the: PMS/Power Management System. the text on the thumbnail and the appearance of the Power Management System display may vary. the text on the thumbnail and the appearance of the Power Management System display may vary.Operational procedures. MAN SYSTEM or PMS 2 Touch the Graphic Display Thumbnail called: POWER • A window similar to the one shown in Typical Power Management System Display on page 348 will be opened. • Depending on the configuration. point. 9. • Depending on the configuration.3. 2 Use the trackball. (See Generator set symbol on page 350) The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. 312401/B 349 . and click with the left button on the main group for the: PMS /Power Management System. Power Management System 9.3.3.2 How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) 1 Push the HOME button. 3 9. • This button opens the Navigator image. It can be found in the upper part of the Graphic Display Navigator. • A window similar to the one shown in Typical Power Management System Display on page 348 will be opened.4 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control Generator set symbol colour interpretation A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker is called a generator set.

ready to connect Prime mover symbol: • Red dot: Prime mover alarm • Grey: Stopped • Grey and yellow: Starting • Green: Running • Green and yellow: Stopping Generator set information box Circuit breaker symbol Generator symbol Prime mover symbol (vs060229b) Each generator set has an information box containing the following information: Figure 161 Generator set information box Mode: Local/semi-auto/auto Operational state of the generator set Stand-by status information (priority in brackets) Low load auto stop blocked Fuel selection/load control selection (vs060230) AUTO Connected 1st to stop (3) 350 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Circuit breaker symbol: Figure 160 Generator set symbol • Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm • In disconnected position: Grey: Open Yellow: Synchronizing/connecting • In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting Generator symbol: • Red dot: Generator alarm • Grey: Stopped • Green: Running.

• A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the generator set. 2 Figure 162 Control dialogue for generator set with start/stop (maximum configuration) Information field Connect the generator Start the generator Set the generator to auto mode Give the generator a higher priority Heavy fuel/diesel oil change over logic Frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500 (vs060223) Disconnect the generator Stop the generator Turn on/off the load dependent stop function Set the generator to semi-auto mode Give the generator a lower priority Diesel oil only Load setpoint confirmation Frequency and load control by the governor Reset alarm messages The most common generator set configuration for a control dialogue with start/stop is shown in figure: Common configuration of a control dialogue for generator set with start/stop on page 352. see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 ) Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. 312401/B 351 . and click on it. Power Management System How to display the control dialogue 1 Open the power management display. (For information about how to open the display. This dialogue may vary according to the system configuration.Operational procedures. • The illustration below shows a maximum configuration.

This means it is starting. • The generator set will not be part of the stand-by system. How to start a generator (Semi-auto mode) 1 Click on the Start softbutton at the control dialogue box. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • Then the generator symbol turns green.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 163 Common configuration of a control dialogue for generator set with start/stop Semi-auto mode In Semi-auto mode the operator controls the generator set using the function keys (softbuttons). • A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator but the diesel will remain running. The function keys are used to start or stop. Note For Semi-auto mode the following applies: • A generator set must be started before it can be connected. This means that it is running idle. connect or disconnect it according to the load condition. How to connect a generator (Semi-auto mode) Note This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. 352 312401/B . • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey.

• The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected. click on the Stop softbutton twice. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. • The text. This means that the prime mover is stopping. 312401/B 353 . without cooling down. cooling down. After cool-down time out. and turns green. This means that the generator is disconnected.Operational procedures. 1 Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. This means that the generator is unloading. the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately. How to disconnect a generator (Semi-auto mode) 1 Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. This means that the generator is synchronizing. This means that the prime mover has stopped. Power Management System 1 Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. is displayed. This means that the generator is connected. This means that the generator set is cooling down. Auto mode In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected. and turns grey. How to stop a generator (Semi-auto mode) Note This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected. • The prime mover symbol turns grey.

• Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that the generator is disconnected. This means that the prime mover is stopping. After cool-down time out. synchronizing and connect. disconnect. How to disconnect a generator (Auto mode) 1 Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. disconnect and direct stop. 1 Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. and turns green. This means that the generator is unloading. • A start command will cause a starting sequence only. • A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected. This means that the generator is connected. the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the generator set is cooling down. • The text cool-down is displayed. Or it is running ready to connect. 354 312401/B . • A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading. This means that the generator is synchronizing. cool-down and stop. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. How to connect a generator (Auto mode) Note This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. and turns grey. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. This means that it is running idle. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected. This means it is starting.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Note For Auto mode the following applies: • A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading.

the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the generator set is cooling down. How to start a generator (Auto mode) 1 Click on the Start softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. click Stop twice. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This means it is starting. • Then the generator symbol turns green. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. and turns grey. When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1 Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected. This means that the prime mover is stopping. is displayed. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle. This means that the generator is disconnected. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately. • The text. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means that the generator is unloading. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately without cooling down. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This means that the prime mover is stopping. This means that the prime mover has stopped.Operational procedures. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. Power Management System • The prime mover symbol turns grey. This is a direct stop without cooling down period. without cooling down. click Stop twice. After a cool-down time out. 312401/B 355 . cooling down. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. How to stop a generator (Auto mode) When the circuit breaker is connected: 1 Click on the Stop softbutton at the control dialogue box.

to give the generator set a higher stand-by priority. • Stop blocked is indicated in the generator set information box. How to activate the heavy fuel oil (HFO) change over logic (Auto mode) 1 Click on the HFO softbutton to activate the heavy fuel oil change-over logic. Higher softbutton at the dialogue box. How to prioritise the generators (higher/lower) (Auto mode) The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last. but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition. How to run the prime mover on diesel oil (DO) (Auto mode) 1 Click on the DO softbutton to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. • The indicated stand-by number is lowered by one.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to stop block On/Off (Auto mode) 1 To block the load dependent stop function. click on the Off softbutton • This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. 1 Click on the Pri. Lower softbutton to give the generator set a lower stand-by priority. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic is not in use. 2 Click on the Pri. • This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. click on the On softbutton. • The indicated stand-by number is increased by one. 356 312401/B . • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. 2 To activate the load dependent stop function.

if any. 2 312401/B 357 .5 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control Note Applicable for i.a. 9. shaft generators. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured. and click on it. • The illustration below shows how the dialogue may look like. How to display the control dialogue 1 Open the Power Management System display. Power Management System How to select frequency and load control (Droop) by the K-Chief 500 (Auto mode) 1 Click on the Droop softbutton to select frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500. • Before resetting any alarm.Operational procedures. How to reset alarm messages (Auto mode) 1 Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 ) Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. (For information about how to open the display. It is based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve (static). rectify the problem. • A dialogue appears containing buttons to operate the generator set. How to select frequency and load control (Isochron) by the governor (Auto mode) 1 Click on the Isochron (Isochronous) softbutton to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor.3.

How to reset alarm messages 1 Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. 358 312401/B . This means that the generator is synchronizing. This means that the generator is unloading. This means that the generator is disconnected. the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. if any. the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator. rectify the problem. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected. • When the shaft generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected and turns grey. How to disconnect the generator 1 Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. • When the shaft generator is synchronizing. and turns green. • Before resetting any alarm. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 164 start/stop Control dialogue for generator set without How to connect the generator 1 Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box. This means that the generator is connected.

3. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the generator set. Power Management System 9. This means that the generator is synchronizing. see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 ) Move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. • The illustration below shows how the dialogue may look like. and turns green. This means that the generator is connected. steam turbine generators.Operational procedures. 2 Figure 165 Control dialogue for generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint How to connect the generator 1 Click on the Connect softbutton at the control dialogue box.a. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. (For information about how to open the display. 312401/B 359 . and click on it. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is connected. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured. How to display the control dialogue 1 Open the Power Management System display.6 How to operate a generator set without start/stop and with adjustable load setpoint Note Applicable for i.

if any. rectify the problem. 9. alternative 1 Available (spare) power Amount of power generated (Vs060225) Frequency of generated power Status: Local/ Semi – Auto/Auto Low load autostop blocked Symmetric/Asymmetric load sharing mode Operational state (Red text indicates an alarm condition) Voltage of generated power 360 312401/B . • The circuit breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected. • Before resetting any alarm. (%)). Click on the OK softbutton. This means that the generator is disconnected. This means that the generator is unloading. • The generator will change the load according to the new setpoint. How to insert load setpoint 1 2 Move the cursor to the load setpoint text box (Load setp.7 How to operate the main switchboard controller Main switchboard controller symbols The main switchboard is available with different layouts dependent on the system configuration.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to disconnect the generator 1 Click on the Disconnect softbutton at the control dialogue box. Underneath is three examples of how it may look like. and turns grey. How to reset alarm messages 1 Click on the Reset softbutton to reset any PMS alarm messages. And type in the new setpoint value.3. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. Figure 166 Main switchboard controller.

alternative 2 Available (spar) power Frequency of generated power (vs060226) Voltage of generated power Amount of power generated Figure 168 Main switchboard controller. and what each of the softbuttons are used for. (For information about how to open the display. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the main switchboard. Power Management System Figure 167 Main switchboard controller.Operational procedures. alternative 3 Available (spar) power (vs060227) Operational state How to display the control dialogue 1 Open the Power Management System display. • The illustration below shows the control dialogue. and click on it. 2 312401/B 361 . see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 ) Move the cursor to the main switchboard.

A change-over takes place. • This will deactivate all logic mentioned under Auto above.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Figure 169 Control dialogue for the main switchboard Busbar information field Load sharing and mode information field Symmetric load sharing Asymmetric load sharing Semi auto mode Resets alarm messages (vs060224) Auto mode Auto mode 1 Click on the Auto softbutton to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. The stand-by and blackout recovery functions are in operation. 362 312401/B . the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. the stand-by generator with the lowest priority number stops. Semi-Auto mode Note This mode is used for commissioning purposes. • When the load increases above an adjustable limit. the generator with the highest priority starts. Selecting Semi-auto will cause a Non Stand-by alarm. Do not use for normal operation. • When the load decreases below an adjustable limit. 1 Click on the Semi-auto softbutton to set the main switchboard controller in Semi-auto mode. • If a blackout situation occur. • If a failure on a connected generator occurs. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under the section above: Auto mode.

8 How to operate a bus-tie breaker Note The control dialogue is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. This dialogue will vary according to how the generator set is configured.3. and click on it. (For information about how to open the display. Power Management System Symmetric (Sym) 1 Click on the Sym softbutton for symmetric load sharing between the generators. How to reset the main switchboard 1 Click on the Reset softbutton to reset the main switchboard controller when in state Operation Blocked. • The load is shared equally between the generators. How to display the control dialogue 1 Open the Power Management System display. Asymmetric (Asym) 1 Click on the Asym softbutton for asymmetric load sharing between two or more connected generators. Remote Control. 9. 2 312401/B 363 .Operational procedures. – Run the rest of the generators close to the low limit of 20 %. the task of running on high load. the asymmetric load sharing is switched off automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. When more than two generators are connected. • The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: – Run one of the generators close to the high load limit of about 80 %. – After an adjustable period of time. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the bus-tie breaker . rotates between the generators. see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 ) Move the cursor to the bus-tie breaker.

• The bus-tie breaker symbol turns yellow. and turns green. How to disconnect 1 Click on the Disconnect softbutton. rectify the problem. • Before resetting any alarm. How to reset 1 Click on the Reset softbutton to reset PMS any alarm messages. 364 312401/B .3. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected.9 How to operate the one-touch auto sequence One-touch auto sequence controller symbol On the Power Management System display is a dialogue which indicates the current state of the operation. Figure 170 Control dialogue for the bus-tie breaker How to connect 1 Click on the Connect softbutton. This means that the bus-tie breaker is connected. This means that the bus-tie breaker is disconnected. if any. Underneath is a figure which illustrates how the dialogue may look like. 9.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • The illustration below shows an example of how a control dialogue for the bus-tie breaker may look like. This means that the bus-tie breaker is unloading. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is connected. and turns grey.

one-touch auto sequencing allows you to set the main switchboard to a set of predefined configurations by clicking on a softbutton.Operational procedures. see How to open the Power Management System display (by using the CRP) on page 349 ) Move the cursor to the one-touch auto sequence symbol. and click on it. Figure 172 One-touch auto sequence dialogue box 2 Predefined modes (vs060228) Abort the selected mode Reset 312401/B 365 . See How to display the control dialogue on page 365. (For information about how to open the display. Power Management System Figure 171 One-touch auto sequence symbol. • A dialogue appears containing softbuttons to operate the one-touch auto sequence . This dialogue will vary according to which of the one-touch auto sequences who are configured. 1 Open the Power Management System display. How to display the control dialogue Note The control dialogue is project specific and may vary from the illustration below. indicating current state of operation To simplify the Power Management System. • The illustration below shows what each of the softbuttons are used for.

9. steam turbine or the main engine.4. • The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode. The system can manage electrical generators driven by diesel engine. The operator controls have different configurations dependent on the type of generator drive.4 MOS operational procedures 9. 366 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to select modes 1 Click on the softbutton for the desired mode. A typical Power Management System display is shown below.1 User interface The Power Management System is mainly operated through a colour display reflecting the ship’s power distribution system. Figure 173 Typical Power Management System display Note Depending on the system configuration the appearance of the Midi Operator Station (MOS) display pictures may vary.

) Push 2 to display the PMS Menu. (Or display the Tag Selection Menu by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text.2 How to operate the main switchboard controller How to open the Power Management System display 1 Push Menu to display the main menu. Power Manager. push the F4 function key to activate the functionality.) Push Enter and the Power Management System display will be shown. • A display showing the switchboard appears. (For information about how to open the display.4. see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367. and push ENTER. 2 3 4 5 How to open the main switchboard controller display 1 Open the Power Management System display. Tag Selection Menu. • This is a password protection function 312401/B 367 . Push Enter to select it. and push ENTER. (Or display the PMS Menu by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text.Operational procedures. Use the navigator key to move the cursor to mark the wanted switchboard. From some display pictures it may be required to push Menu twice before the main menu is displayed. PMS Menu. 2 3 4 If the text.) Push 1 to display Tag Overview. and push ENTER. appear on the left side of the F4 function key. Enable commands. Push 2 to display the Tag Selection Menu. Power Management System 9. (Or display the Tag Overview by pushing the navigator key so the cursor moves to the text.

• The text for the function keys will now appear on the right side of the display. 7 Push the function key for the desired function. 368 312401/B . The following functions are available: • Symmetric • Asymmetric • Connect more power (Connect more pwr) • Disconnect surplus power (Disconn surplus pwr) • Stop block on • Stop block off • Reset • Auto • Semi-auto Note If there are more than four functions on the left side of the display.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 5 Type inn the password.) Figure 174 Typical main switchboard controller display 6 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. use the page up/page down keys to display them. (See figure Generator set with start stop control on page 371. • The number of functions will vary according to how the switchboard is configured.

for a symmetric load sharing between the generators. Asymmetric. to set the main switchboard controller in auto mode. Power Management System Symmetric 1 Push the function key beside the text. Symmetric. • When the load decreases below an adjustable limit. Auto. the stand-by generator with the highest priority will start. – After an adjustable period of time. – Run the rest of the generators close to the low limit of 20 %. 312401/B 369 . • If a failure on a connected generator occurs. • The load is shared equally between the generators. for an asymmetric load sharing between two or more connected generators. the task of running on high load. • The asymmetric load sharing will attempt the following: – Run one of the generators close to the high load limit of about 80 %. the asymmetric load sharing is switched off automatically and will use symmetric load sharing. The stand-by and blackout recovery functions are in operation. Reset. to reset the main switchboard controller when it is in state Operation Blocked. Asymmetric 1 Push the function key beside the text. • If a blackout situation occur. A change-over takes place. Reset 1 Push the function key beside the text. When more than two generators are connected. • When the load increases above an adjustable limit. rotates between the generators. the generator with the highest priority starts. Auto mode 1 Push the function key beside the text. the stand-by generator with the lowest priority will stop.Operational procedures. the stand-by generator with the highest priority starts. Remote Control.

Circuit breaker symbol: Figure 175 Generator set symbol • Red dot: Circuit breaker alarm • In disconnected position: Grey: Open Yellow: Synchronizing/connecting • In connected position: Green: Connected Yellow: Disconnecting Protection symbol: • Red dot: Protection alarm • Green: OK Generator symbol: • Red dot: Generator alarm • Grey: Stopped • Green: Running. Do not use for normal operation. Selecting Semi-auto will cause a Non Stand-by alarm.3 How to operate a generator set with start/stop control Generator set symbol colour interpretation A generator with its prime mover and circuit breaker (as seen below) is called a generator set. 9.4. ready to connect Prime mover symbol: • Red dot: Prime mover alarm • Grey: Stopped • Grey and yellow: Starting • Green: Running • Green and yellow: Stopping Circuit breaker symbol Generator symbol Prime mover symbol (vs060229b) 370 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Semi-auto mode Note This mode is used for commissioning purposes. The following information is contained in the colours used for the generator set. This will deactivate all logic mentioned under the section above: Auto mode.

Operational procedures. push the F4 function key to activate the functionality. (For information about how to open the display. • The display shows now the selected generator set 2 3 4 If the text. • This is a password protection function 5 Type inn the password. The following functions are available: • Connect • Disconnect 312401/B 371 . Push Enter to select the generator. • The text for the function keys will now appear on the right side of the display. Enable commands.) Figure 176 Generator set with start stop control 6 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all the available functions for the function keys. appear on the left side of the F4 function key. (See figure Generator set with start stop control on page 371. Power Management System How to open the generator set control display 1 Open the Power Management System display.) Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. 7 Push the function key for the desired function. see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.

higher • Pri. 2 Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the option for the wanted information. 372 312401/B .) • The detailed information can be found by selecting from the options shown to the left. And can be found on the left side of the generator set display. (For information on opening the display see: How to open the generator set control display on page 371. lower • Load setpoint • HFO on • HFO off • Droop • Isochronous How to display detailed information The following detailed information displays are available: • Generator frequency • Generator voltage • Generator current • Generator load • Generator relative load • Power factor 1 Open the generator set control display to select a generator set.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Reset • Start • Stop • Auto • Semi-auto • Stop block on • Stop block off • Pri.

• A display showing the selected detailed display is opened.Operational procedures. • Underneath is a figure showing a display of the frequency. • A display showing the tag details view is shown. By following the procedure underneath. Figure 178 Tag details view for a frequency tag 5 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all the available information. How to open the Generator Protection display All marine generators must be protected according to the rules of the classification societies. Figure 177 Frequency display 4 Push Enter once more to display a tag details view for this tag. the list of monitored functions will be displayed. Power Management System 3 Push Enter to select. The following figure is a tag details view of a frequency tag. 312401/B 373 .

Current • Voltage • OverLoad • Frequency • VAr import/export Each of these is indicated by a coloured dot. The interpretation of the colours are: • Green dot: OK • Red dot: Alarm • Blue dot: Inhibited • Grey dot: Function not active • Orange dot: Invalid In addition to the list of monitored functions. 2 A list of monitored functions are displayed. These are: • Short Circuit • Over Current • Reverse Power • Diff. Protection. Push Enter to select.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the text. (It can be located at the right side of the generator set symbol. connect or disconnect it according to the load condition. 2 Semi-auto mode In Semi-auto mode the operator control the generator set using the function keys to start or stop. See Generator set without start/stop on page 380) Push Enter to select the Generator Protection display. the following information is available at the end of the list: • Current Measurement • Voltage Measurement • Frequency Measurement 1 Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the function/information you want. 374 312401/B .

This means that the generator is disconnected. How to start a generator (Semi-auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Start. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means it is starting. 312401/B 375 . • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the generator is connected. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. Power Management System Note For Semi-auto mode the following applies: • A generator set must be started before it can be connected. • A disconnect will unload and disconnect the generator. How to disconnect a generator (Semi-auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Disconnect. • The generator set will not be part of the stand-by system. This means that the generator is synchronizing. This means that the generator is unloading. This means that it is running idle. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. How to connect a generator (Semi-auto mode) This is only possible when the prime mover is running at nominal speed. 1 Push the function key for Connect.Operational procedures. How to stop a generator (Semi-auto mode) This is only possible when the circuit breaker is disconnected. • Then the generator symbol turns green. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. But the diesel will remain running.

without cooling down. • A start command will cause a starting sequence only. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. This means it is starting. This means that it is running idle. cool-down and stop. synchronizing and connect. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. Auto mode In auto mode the generator is automatically started and stopped according to the load condition and the priority setting. • The text cool-down is displayed. • A stop command will cause the following sequence: Unloading. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. push the function key for Stop twice. This means that the generator is connected.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1 Push the function key for Stop. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. 1 Push the function key for Connect. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. This means that the prime mover is stopping. Note For Auto mode the following applies: • A disconnect command will cause the following sequence: Unloading. 376 312401/B . • A connect command will cause the following sequence: Starting. How to connect a generator (Auto mode) This is only possible when the prime mover is stopped and ready for start. This means that the generator set is cooling down. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately. disconnect and direct stop. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. disconnect. This means that the generator is synchronizing.

• The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. • The text cooling down is displayed. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the generator is disconnected. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. How to stop a generator (Auto mode) When the circuit breaker is connected: 1 Push the function key for Stop. Power Management System How to disconnect a generator (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Disconnect. push Stop twice. This means that the prime mover has stopped. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. without cooling down. • The prime mover symbol turns grey. • The prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This means that the prime mover is stopping. This means that the prime mover is stopping. This means that the generator is unloading. This means that the generator is disconnected. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately. This means that the generator set is cooling down. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. 2 To stop the prime mover immediately. After cool-down time out the prime mover symbol turns green and yellow. This is a direct stop without cooling down period. This means that the prime mover is stopping. When the circuit breaker is disconnected: 1 Push the function key for Stop. This means that the generator is unloading. • The text cool-down is displayed. push the function key for Stop twice.Operational procedures. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. This means that the prime mover has stopped. This means that the generator set is cooling down. 312401/B 377 .

• The indicated stand-by number is lowered by one. This means it is starting. but will switch to heavy fuel oil during loaded condition. Stop block On/Off (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Stop block on to block the load dependent stop function. Higher to give the generator set a higher stand-by priority. higher/lower) (Auto mode) The generator set with the highest priority will start first and stop last.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to start a generator (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Start. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic will start and stop the prime mover using diesel oil. Lower to give the generator set a lower stand-by priority. How to activate the heavy fuel oil (HFO) change-over logic (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for HFO (heavy fuel oil) to activate the heavy fuel oil change-over logic. 378 312401/B . 2 Push the function key for Pri. The generator set with the lowest priority will start last and stop first. • The indicated stand-by number is increased by one. • The prime mover symbol turns yellow and grey. • Then the generator symbol turns green. This means that it is running nominal and ready to connect. 2 Push the function key for Stop block off to activate the load dependent stop function. • This means that the generator will not stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. • This means that the generator will stop when there is a low load on the main switchboard. How to prioritize higher/lower (Pri. 1 Push the function key for Pri. • Then the prime mover symbol turns green. This means that it is running idle.

How to activate frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500 (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Droop to select frequency and load control by the K-Chief 500. shaft generators. • Before resetting any alarm. rectify the problem. (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for DO to run the prime mover on diesel oil only. How to activate frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Isochron (Isochronous) to select frequency and load control by the diesel engine speed governor. if any. 2 312401/B 379 . Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. 9. Power Management System How to run the prime mover only on diesel oil.4. • The heavy fuel oil change-over logic is not in use.a. see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367.Operational procedures. Reset (Auto mode) 1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. How to open the generator set display 1 Open the Power Management System display.4 How to operate a generator set without start/stop control Note Applicable for i. It is based on diesel engine speed governor droop curve. (For information about how to open the display.

and text for the function keys appear on the right side.) Figure 179 Generator set without start/stop 4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. 380 312401/B . This means that the generator is connected. 5 Push the function key for the desired function. This means that the generator is synchronizing. • The display shows now the selected generator set. • When the shaft generator is synchronizing. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green. The following functions are available: • Connect • Disconnect • Reset Connect 1 Push the function key for Connect. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 3 Push Enter to select the generator. (See figure Generator set without start/stop on page 380. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. the diesel generators connected to the bus bar will regulate the frequency just below the frequency of the shaft generator.

Push Enter to select the generator. 2 3 4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys. Reset 1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. and text for the function keys appear on the right side. but with adjustable load setpoint Note Applicable for i. • Before resetting any alarm.5 How to operate a generator set without start/stop. Power Management System Disconnect 1 Push the function key for Disconnect. • When the shaft generator is unloading. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. • The number of functions will vary according to how the generator set is configured. rectify the problem. 5 Push the function key for the desired function. Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the generator set you want to control. This means that the generator is disconnected. This means that the generator is unloading. How to open the generator set display 1 Open the Power Management System display. (For information about how to open the display. see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367. steam turbine generators. 9.a. if any. • The display shows now the selected generator set. The following functions are available: 312401/B 381 .4.Operational procedures. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. the diesel generators connected to the same bus bar will increase their power to take the load off the shaft generator.

This means that the generator is disconnected. • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow.4. rectify the problem. This means that the generator is synchronizing. 1 Push the function key for Load setp. Load setp. This means that the generator is unloading. 382 312401/B . • The circuit breaker symbol turns yellow. (If the function key is not available.6 How to operate a bus-tie breaker How to open the bus-tie breaker display Note The bus-tie breaker display is project specific and may vary from the illustration below.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 • Connect • Disconnect • Load setp. This means that the generator is connected. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates connected and turns green.) • A dialogue appears. • Before resetting any alarm. if any. Reset 1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. use the page up/page down keys to display it. 9. • The circuit breaker symbol indicates disconnected and turns grey. Disconnect 1 Push the function key for Disconnect. Push enter. 2 3 Use the alphanumeric keys to type inn the wanted value. • Reset Connect 1 Push the function key for Connect.

• The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is connected.Operational procedures. • The system automatically makes the necessary actions to set the main switchboard to this mode. 312401/B 383 . • The display shows now the selected bus-tie breaker. (For information about how to open the display. This means that the bus-tie breaker is connected. Push the function key for the desired mode. Power Management System 1 Open the Power Management System display. Push Enter to select the bus-tie breaker. and turns green. see How to open the Power Management System display on page 367. Use the navigator key to move the cursor to the bus tie breaker you want to control. 5 Connect 1 Push the function key for Connect. and text for the function keys appear on the right side. 2 3 Figure 180 Bus-tie breaker display 4 Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to display all available functions for the function keys.

• The bus-tie breaker symbol turns yellow.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Disconnect 1 Push the function key for Disconnect. Reset 1 Push the function key for Reset to reset any alarm messages. 384 312401/B . if any. and turns grey. rectify the problem. • The bus-tie breaker symbol indicates that it is disconnected. This means that the bus-tie breaker is disconnected. This means that the bus-tie breaker is unloading. • Before resetting any alarm.

1 Overview This document gives an overview of parameters that can be inspected and adjusted from an Operator Station. The following subjects are covered: • Overview of tag types • Alarm and monitoring parameters • Engineer’s safety 312401/B 385 . Where applicable other parameter details are included.Reference Guide 10 REFERENCE GUIDE 10.

5 Milliamps 0 . Note This is a general list of tags. A tag type defines the software used to read a channel on a Distributed Processing Unit.5 Voltage 0 .2 Tag types Overview The following is a list of available tag types in the K-Chief 500 system.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 10. Your system may therefore not have all the mentioned tags.1 Voltage ± 1 Voltage ± 5 Voltage ± 10 Voltage 0 . the input signal is 4-20 mA.20 PT 50 PT 100 PT 1000 Potmeter 1 K 386 312401/B .10 Milliamps ± 1 Milliamps ± 5 Milliamps ± 10 Milliamps ± 20 Milliamps 0 .1 Milliamps 0 .10 Milliamps 0 . The tag type defines which application to run on the signal. Basic tag types Tag type number 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 26 Channel type Undefined type Voltage ± 0. 2 in a Remote Analogue Input module (RAi-16) is tag type 20. A channel is where a signal is physically connected to a Distributed Processing Unit.20 Milliamps 4 . Example: If channel no.1 Voltage 0 .1 Voltage 0 .

Reference Guide Tag type number 27 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 38 40 41 43 44 45 46 47 49 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 141 142 143 144 150 200 201 255 Channel type Potmeter 5 K On-off without check (RAi-16) On-off single check (RAi-16) On-off double check (RAi-16) RDi-32 digital input Counter event Counter frequency Counter time TC element AC voltage 10 bit AC current 10 bit Generator frequency Bus frequency Phase difference Cosine phi Phase velocity Pick up Exhaust mean Exhaust deviation Rio PLC type DO (digital out) 401 client DOT (digital out) handler AO (analogue out) 401 client AO (analogue out) handler Exhaust deviation limit Alarm relay Local alarm system Rotating light handler ASCII IO handler SSC IO handler DS 401 handler Dead man handler Serial AI Serial DI System tag handler 312401/B 387 .

10. If the Distributed Processing Unit type is a Remote Analogue Output module. All channels in a Remote Digital Output module are automatically an output channel type. 388 312401/B . the following analogue output channel types are available: Channel type number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Channel type 0 .5.0 mA Relays Binary out is defined as a channel in a Remote Digital Output module.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Analogue output tags Tag type and Distributed Processing Unit type defines the analogue output channel type.0 mA 4 .0 Volt 0 .0 Volt ±5.20.0 Volt ±10.20.0 Volt 0 .

Units Low Eng.1 Analogue input tag items Parameter name Enable Gradient Alarm Enable Alarm Low Enable Alarm Low Low Enable Alarm High Enable Alarm High High Enable Event Low Enable Event Low Low Enable Event High Enable Event High High Gradient Block Limit Gradient Limit Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Dynamic Dead Band Counts Low Counts High Eng.3 Alarm and monitoring parameters 10.Reference Guide 10.3. 312401/B 389 . Units High Raw Value Raw Percent Value Scaled Value Filtered Value Type Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Function Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Block if measured value is < block limit Gradient alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Report value dead band limit A/D minimum value A/D maximum value Instrument minimum value Instrument maximum value Measured raw value directly from ADC Measured raw value in % of range Measured value scaled to technical value Filtered scaled value Some of the parameters are further explained below.

The alarm and event status is updated as following (if the enable flag is set): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LL= on. the gradient alarm is activated if the calculated gradient value exceeds the gradient limit. if Filtered_value > event_1 limit Ev_2 = on. if Filtered_value < alarm_LL limit L = on. Select YES for enable. When the process value falls below the block limit. Filter time The filter function is a 2nd order Butterworth filter. if Filtered_value > event_2 limit Ev_3 = on. NO for disable. In order to make the gradient more robust against noise.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Enable alarms and events Alarms may be enabled or disabled by altering the value of the enable parameters. hence the lowest cut-off frequency is 10 Hz with the time constant set to 0. If the enable flag is set. the alarm/event status will be updated. the corresponding status is cleared. • Block limit: A process value below this limit inhibits the gradient alarm. if Filtered_value > event_3 limit Ev_4 = on. Each alarm and event limit has its own enable flag. • Gradient limit: The gradient alarm is activated if the gradient value (in units/sec) exceeds this limit. A time constant = 0 disables the filter. Gradient parameters The gradient calculation uses the filtered value as input. The scaled process value is filtered with a user defined filter time constant. 390 312401/B . if Filtered_value > event_4 limit The LL. The filtered process value is compared with four alarm and four event limits. If the enable flag is not set. it is calculated based on a moving average over the three last samples of the filtered value. if Filtered_value > alarm_H limit HH = on. Alarm and event limits Alarm and event limits are entered in technical units. The time constant resolution is 0. which defines the cut-off frequency for the filter. if Filtered_value > alarm_HH limit Ev_1 = on. if Filtered_value < alarm_L limit H = on. the gradient alarm will be blocked. H and HH alarms are activated as soon as the alarm delay has expired.1 seconds. L. Above this process value.1 seconds.

This parameter is used for dynamic update of the process value for external tag users. the legal count range may be less. Scaling parameters The scaling parameters are given in corresponding pairs of technical values and measured values read from the analogue to digital converter. The result of this sampling is a value in the range 0 to 65535 counts. The dynamic dead band parameter is only in use if the external tag parameter is set to YES. Units Low The instrument range is: Counts High – Counts Low Figure 181 Scaling parameters Measured values Each channel is sampled from a 16 bit analogue to digital converter every 10 milliseconds. Units High – Eng. When the process value becomes greater/less than the last sent value with more than the dynamic dead-band.Reference Guide Dynamic dead band The dynamic dead band is entered in engineering units with the same number of decimals as specified for the process value. a new value is sent. The table below shows the count range for the different signal types available: 312401/B 391 . Depending on the type of signal connected. The technical sensor range is: Eng.

The Scaled Value is used as input to the 2nd order Butterworth filter to produce the Filtered Value. 392 312401/B . and from this value the raw percent value is calculated (± 100.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Code 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 26 27 Short Text VOLT_PM_01 VOLT_PM_1 VOLT_PM_5 VOLT_PM_10 VOLT_0_01 VOLT_0_1 VOLT_0_5 VOLT_0_10 MA_PM_1 MA_PM_5 MA_PM_10 MA_PM_20 MA_0_1 MA_0_5 MA_0_10 MA_0_20 MA_4_20 PT_50 PT_100 PT_1000 POT_1K POT_5K Counts High 45874 45874 45874 58981 45874 45874 45874 58981 58981 39321 45874 58981 58981 39321 45874 58981 58981 See 1) See 1) See 1) See 2) See 2) Counts Low 19660 19660 19660 6553 32767 32767 32767 32767 6553 26214 19660 6553 32767 32767 32767 32767 38010 See 1) See 1) See 1) See 2) See 2) 1 The RTD elements are automatically calculated based on interpolation with values fetched from a pre-defined table. The scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable. By using the scaling parameters the Scaled Value is calculated.00). The count scaling parameters are therefore not adjustable. The potentiometer signal types are automatically calculated based on a conversion algorithm. 2 The Raw Value for a channel is the result of the sampling of the analogue to digital converter.

it is possible to filter the counter input signal with a digital filter in order to avoid contact noise to be counted.2 Counter input tag items Parameter name Enable Alarm Low Enable Alarm Low Low Enable Alarm High Enable Alarm High High Enable Event Low Enable Event Low Low Enable Event High Enable Event High High Limit Alarm Low Low Limit Alarm Low Limit Alarm High Limit Alarm High High Limit Event Low Low Limit Event Low Limit Event High Limit Event High High Filter Time Filter Index Time Base Pulses Per Eng.Reference Guide 10. Units Raw Value Scaled Value Filtered Value Dynamic Dead Band Type Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Function Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Event limit Time in 100 milliseconds Counter input pin filter Counting time code: ms=0:s=1:min=2:hr=3 Pulses per engineering unit Measured raw value directly from counter Measured value scaled to technical value Filtered scaled value Report value dead band limit Parameters specific to counter inputs are described below. The Filter index parameter specifies the digital filter cut-off frequency according to the table below.3. Filter index 0 Cut-off frequency 1 Hz 312401/B 393 . Counter input parameters Filter index When using the counter as an event counter.

In the event counting mode. the Time base parameter specifies in which time unit the measurement shall be calculated. Pulses per Eng. the scaling algorithm needs to know the number of pulses generated by the counting sensor per engineering unit. This is specified by the Pulses per Eng Unit parameter. 394 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Filter index 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cut-off frequency 5 Hz 10 Hz 50 Hz 100 Hz 500 Hz Disabled Time base When using the counter for frequency or time measurements. The following values are available: Time base 0 1 2 3 Time unit Milliseconds Seconds Minutes Hours Note Time base = 0 is not available when using the counter in frequency mode. Pulses per engineering unit is for instance: • 10 pulses per litre (flow rate) • 120 pulses per revolution (engine RPM) • 100 of pulses per knot (ship speed) Counter input measured values Raw value This value is read directly from the counter. Unit When using the counter in frequency measurement mode. this value is the same as the scaled value.

312401/B 395 . In time mode. the Scaled value is calculated from the raw value using the Pulses per Eng Units and the Time base parameters. Filtered value The Scaled value is used as input to the 2nd order Butterworth filter to produce the Filtered value. only the Time base parameter is used to calculate the Scaled value. the Scaled value is the same as the raw value.Reference Guide Scaled value In the event counting mode. In the frequency counting mode.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 10. Digital input parameters Delays Digital input status is delayed to remove rapid irrelevant transitions. The delay time specifies how long time the signal must be stable before the new input value is accepted. Invert The input value can be used directly or inverted before use. The value 20 means a delay of 2 seconds. The delay time is specified in units of 100 milliseconds. Input values Input status both before and after time delay is available. 396 312401/B . Specify YES to invert the input signal.3 Digital input tag items Parameter name On delay Off delay Enable Alarm Low Enable Alarm High Enable Event Low Enable Event High Invert Input value Delayed input Type Number Number Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Function Delay in 100 milliseconds Delay in 100 milliseconds Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable alarm Enable/disable event Enable/disable event Invert input status Input status before time delay Input status after time delay Only the parameters specific to digital inputs are described below.3.

312401/B 397 .3. the mean temperature high high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high high limit.Reference Guide 10.4 Exhaust mean value tag items Parameter name Mean Temperature High High Enable Alarm High Enable Alarm High High Mean Temperature High Mean Temperature Block Deviation Temperature High Deviation Temperature Low Cylinder 1 Temperature Cylinder 2 Temperature Cylinder 3 Temperature Cylinder 4 Temperature Cylinder 5 Temperature Cylinder 6 Temperature Cylinder 7 Temperature Cylinder 8 Temperature Cylinder 9 Temperature Cylinder 10 Temperature Cylinder 11 Temperature Cylinder 12 Temperature Cylinder 13 Temperature Cylinder 14 Temperature Cylinder 15 Temperature Cylinder 16 Temperature Dynamic Alarm Limit Mean Temperature Type Number Yes/no Yes/no Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Function Alarm limit Alarm enable/disable Alarm enable/disable Alarm limit Alarm blocking limit Alarm limit Alarm limit Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Temperature tag number reference Deviation alarm limit Calculated mean temperature Exhaust mean value parameters Mean temperature high high/Enable alarm high high If the mean temperature high high enable is set to YES.

Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Mean temperature high The mean temperature high alarm is activated if the calculated mean temperature increases above the mean temperature high limit. when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature high alarm limit. Mean temperature block/Deviation temperature high/Deviation temperature low If the mean temperature falls below the mean temperature block limit. Dynamic deviation alarm limit Alarm limit at current mean temperature. The Deviation temperature high limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder. 398 312401/B . The actual deviation alarm limit is a dynamical calculated alarm limit that each cylinder uses for deviation alarm detection. The figure below gives a graphical illustration of the different parameters. The Deviation temperature low limit defines the maximum allowed deviation from the mean temperature for each cylinder. when the mean temperature is equal to the mean temperature block limit. all deviation alarms are inhibited.

312401/B 399 . are used for calculating the mean temperature. Only the cylinder references that are in use. Mean temperature The Mean temperature is calculated as an average of all the cylinders specified in the cylinder temperature reference parameters.Reference Guide Figure 182 Exhaust mean value parameters Cylinder 1 – 16 temperature The Cylinder (1–16) temperature parameters are tag number references for each cylinder’s temperature measurement. Cylinder temperatures that are in instrument fail are not used in the calculation.

400 312401/B .3. and activates the exhaust deviation alarm if the normalised temperature is outside the legal deviation range. This is normally done when the engine is running in steady state at 100 % load. The reason for using a correction temperature is that all cylinders have their own normal operating temperatures. the cylinder temperature is normalised.5 Exhaust deviation tag items Parameter name Correction Temperature Cylinder Temperature Reference Normalized Temperature Type Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes No Function Correction temperature This temperature tag number Measured temperature + temperature correction There has to be one exhaust deviation tag item for each cylinder.RealCylindertemp Cylinder temperature reference The Cylinder temperature reference parameter is a tag number reference to the each cylinder’s temperature. so that the deviation alarm limits are valid for all cylinders. which mostly are not equal to the engine mean temperature. The correction temperature is calculated in the following way: Correction_temperature = Meantemp .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 10. Normalised temperature The Normalised temperature is calculated in the following way: Cylinder_normalised_temp = RealCylindertemp + Correction_temp This normalised cylinder temperature is again used for checking against the deviation limits to generate the deviation alarm. This tag item checks the normalised cylinder temperature against the deviation alarm limit calculated by the exhaust mean temperature tag item. Exhaust deviation parameters Correction temperature Each cylinder’s Correction temperature is calculated only on request from the operator. By adding the correction temperature to the real cylinder temperature.

The number 234. Tag name The External tag parameter = YES means that this tag is used by another module. Decimal point Technical process values are represented as a fixed-point value.6 Common sub-menu items Parameter name Tag type Decimal point External tag Tag name Type Number Number Yes/no Text Adjustable Yes Yes No No Function RIO channel type Fixed point location for tag analogue value Yes if tag is used by some other tag Tag’s global name Common sub-menu parameters Tag type The channel type is a code specifying how the input signal is handled and scaled.Reference Guide 10. The Tag name parameter is the global tag name. The tag’s value will be automatically transmitted for external use. There are 255 different codes available. Most control applications are external.23 is internally represented with a value of 23423 and a decimal point of 2. Note that control applications mostly have decimal point 1.3. 312401/B 401 .

Inhibit parameters Tag number Specifies the tag number to check status for. The new condition must be stable for the time specified by the delay parameter before the new alarm condition is accepted.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 10. The specified tag number’s external parameter must be set to activate the Process Data Object (PDO) transmission on changes. and an event is issued. 402 312401/B . Delays are specified in seconds. as well as delay of inhibit On and Off.7 Alarm sub-menu items Parameter name Alarm On Delay1 Alarm Off Delay1 Alarm On Delay2 Alarm Off Delay2 Inhibit On Delay Inhibit Off Delay Inhibit Tag Type Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Function High/low delay off (1 second) High/low delay off (1 second) High high/low low delay off (1 second) High high/low low delay off (1 second) Inhibit delay on (1 second) Inhibit delay off (1 second) Tag number to inhibit this channel Alarm and inhibit delays There are separate parameters for alarm delay On and Off. a timer is started. When the condition for alarm or inhibit is changed.3.

4 Engineer’s safety 10. When activated.3 Local control The system is activated and de-activated manually by a key-switch. If the system is not reset within a new time period.4.Reference Guide 10. the system will activate a rotating light after expired time delay. Reset can be pressed at any time. 10.4.4. The system will typically be activated from the Operator Station by selected alarms when running an unattended engine room.1 Purpose The Engineer’s safety system (dead man system) is a system for engineer fitness. the reset button must be pressed by the engineer within a pre-defined time period. The engineer must now reset the system. 10. the system will activate an alarm.4 Operator Station control When an alarm occurs in bridge watch.5 Parameters Parameter name Tag1: Start Tag2: Stop Tag3: Reset Type Number Number Number Adjustable Yes Yes Yes Function Start/on digital input Tag reference Stop/off digital input Tag reference Reset digital input Tag reference Initial value N/A N/A N/A Parameter reference Tag 1 Tag 2 Tag 3 312401/B 403 . stop and reset from push-buttons • Control from the Operator Station • Warning light activated by relay • Alarm horn activated by relay • Range check of timers according to IMO rules When active. the engineer safety handler is activated. the system will indicate “Engineer fitness alarm”.4. The system can also be activated automatically from the alarm system when an engine room alarm occurs during unattended engine room. The timers are not reset by the command from the Operator Station. If not.4.2 Functions • Start. 10. A number of reset push-buttons are located around the ship. 10. if already running. The timers are reset every time activated.

the tag pointed to by tag 5 will be activated. The decimal point is 0. When an alarm occurs in bridge watch.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Parameter name Tag4: On Watch Type Number Adjustable Yes Function Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that someone is set on Watch Remote Operator Station Tag for telling the Dead man system that a new alarm is activated Time from reset or start until warning is activated Time from warning is activated until alarm Enable check timers according to IMO rules for machinery dead man system Initial value N/A Parameter reference Tag 4 Tag5: New Alarm Number Yes N/A Tag 5 T1: Warning time T2: Alarm time S1: IMO Compliant Number Number Yes/no Yes Yes Yes 20 min 150 s Yes P1 P2 B1 Tags 4 and 5 are used when the dead man handler is part of the Watch Calling System at the Operator Station. The tag then pointed to by tag 4 is active when the Watch Calling System is set to bridge watch. and this will activate the dead man handler in the same way as if tag 1 was activated. 404 312401/B .

cabinets.Maintenance 11 MAINTENANCE 11. This consists of the following: • Cleaning monitors. air filters etc. Due to the lack of moving parts. the maintenance actions performed by the operator is very limited. Only the preventive and corrective actions performed by the operator is described in this manual. • Running on-line tests • Replacing fuses 312401/B 405 .1 Introduction The on-board maintenance of the K-Chief 500 system involves both preventive and corrective maintenance. panels.

Refer to the Classification Societies and/or the Ship’s Maintenance Plan (or Site’s Maintenance Plan) for obtaining a recommended preventive maintenance schedule for test of measuring points and of the alarm system. • Yearly – Check and. fuse connections and plug connections. The societies normally recommend a 3-monthly to 6-monthly schedule.2 Preventive maintenance 11.2. calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. if necessary. calibrating and re-installing or replacement of pressure sensors. After this type of maintenance. Kongsberg Maritime recommends that the operation of each unit and its functions is checked after any major maintenance. Do the following: Operator Stations and Operator Panels Each week. temperature sensors etc. testing.2.2 Weekly maintenance This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons. we recommend each unit to be re-commissioned according to the instruction given in the relevant maintenance manual. 406 312401/B .1 Maintenance schedule Preventive maintenance routines must be performed regularly and effectively to ensure that the equipment is kept in top condition. electrical screw-terminals. do the following for each Operator Station and Operator Panel: 1 Clean the front of the panel and graphics display unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm. Pushing function test buttons will not interrupt normal system operation. Note Cleaning with abrasive material or strong chemical cleaning solutions is not recommended as these may damage the unit. Kongsberg Maritime recommends the following preventive maintenance schedule for the Alarm and Monitoring System: • Weekly – None. mild soapy water not too wet. 11. By major maintenance is understood the removing.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 11. • 6-monthly – Check cables and cable entrances.

use a clean. Distributed Processing Units This maintenance routine applies to units equipped with lamp and/or function test buttons.not too wet. refer to the troubleshooting section in the relevant maintenance manual. damp cloth which has been dipped in a solution of a mild dish detergent and water. For heavier cleaning. The display (if any) should display configuration data. clean it. 2 Push LAMP TEST. Hence. • If the test fails. • If the test fails.Maintenance 2 3 Push LAMP TEST. refer to the troubleshooting section in the relevant maintenance manual. 312401/B 407 . check the following parts of the system each 6-months period: 1 Check cables and cable entrances for damage to the cable.3 6–monthly maintenance Where applicable. Wring out firmly before wiping the unit. • All alarm groups and the system failure indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on for about five seconds. Midi Operator Station Each week. do the following for each Watch Bridge and Watch Cabin Unit: 1 Clean the front of the unit using a clean cloth and a solution of warm. Note Never use cleaning solutions containing spirit or alcohol. as described in the relevant maintenance manual.2. Watch Calling System Each week. mild soapy water . the Distributed Processing Units do not require weekly maintenance. 11. • If any additional preventive maintenance procedures are to be carried out. If the unit is fitted with an air filter. do the following for each Midi Operator Station: 1 Clean the surface of the Midi Operator Station and display screen using a clean damp cloth. • If one or more LEDs fail to illuminate or the buzzer is silent. replace the unit. refer to the description in the relevant manufacturer’s manual. 3 All indicators should be lit and the buzzer turned on.

check and if necessary calibrate the input sensors and output actuators according to the manufacturer’s instructions. by calibrating the sensor or the signal itself.2. with the input signals on other systems or local gauges. The calibration software is accessible from the Tag Details menu on the Operator Station. it is not necessary to re-calibrate sensors if the input signal is unchanged. 408 312401/B .Kongsberg K-Chief 500 2 3 Tighten all electrical screw terminals. Tighten all plug connections. or from the Midi Operator Station when available. 11. Compare the input signal to this system. Sensors can be calibrated in two ways.4 Yearly maintenance Each year. In general. or by calibrating the signal using the software calibration tool built into the K-Chief 500.

refer to the K-Chief 500 Maintenance Manual or other relevant manufacturer’s manuals.Maintenance 11. For all other corrective maintenance. The corrective maintenance performed by the operator is limited to replacement of defective fuses. 312401/B 409 .3 Corrective maintenance Corrective maintenance procedures must be performed to replace faulty parts in the event of a system malfunction.

4 Built In Self-Test (BIST) Note The K-Chief 500 is a modular system. The DPUs referred to in this section will therefore not always reflect the operator’s system.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 11. Check all inputs. and for a specific project configuration the DPU models used will vary. The Master CPU has most probably lost communication with one ore more of its local DPUs. dPSC only. Check CAN connections. C3 and C4 only.1 How to handle DPU error codes All Distributed Processing Units have a Built-In Self-Test (BIST) functionality. Tag details gives detailed information. CAN 1 — plug X8 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 CAN controller bus off CAN controller error status set CAN controller overrun Rx queue overrun HP Tx queue overrun LP Tx queue overrun Transmit fault CAN 1 — plug X9 410 312401/B . 11. dPSC only. Check all channels for high current load. Check the ambient temperature. These tests report errors to the Operator Stations on the system channel. Value = Config fail channel *64 + 45.4. The following table gives an overview of the error codes and gives appropriate actions to be taken: Error code 49 48 47 46 45 44 42 41 Error description RAM fail Transmitter overcurrent (RAi-16 and C1 modules) Fuse fail (RDi-32 and C1 modules) CPU Board temperature high Configuration fail dPSC link failure EEPROM read failure Slave CPU application change-over Action Replace the module.

4. a 7–segment display on the RIO-C3 Generator Protection module indicates trip information and status. Figure 183 RIO-C3 7–segment display Use the following table to decode the 7–segment display on the module if a trip is activated: 1. digit = code for function 0 1 2 3 Not used Short circuit Overcurrent Reverse power 0 1 2 3 2.2 RIO-C3 7–segment display In independent systems without an external man-machine interface. digit = code for phase No phase defined L1 or L1–L2 L2 or L1–L3 L3 or L2–L3 0 1 2 3 3. 11. digit = code for level No level defined Level 1 or Low or (VAR) import Level 2 or Low Low Level 3 or High or (VAR) export 312401/B 411 .Maintenance Error code 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 Error description CAN controller bus off CAN controller error status set CAN controller overrun Rx queue overrun HP Tx queue overrun LP Tx queue overrun Transmit fault Action Check CAN connections.

4. digit = code for function 4 5 6 7 8 9 Differential current Voltage Overload Frequency VAR Not used 4 5 6 7 8 9 2. Corrective actions None. the LEDs on the front panel of the DPU in question must be checked. Check the power LED indicator and. if applicable. Power LED Green 412 312401/B .3 How to handle DPU communication errors If the Operator Station gives a communication error for one of the Distributed Processing Units.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 1. perform corrective actions according to the table below. Figure 184 DPU front panel LED indicators (typical) Power indicator 1 2 Power mode Power OK Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given. digit = code for level Level 4 or High High Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 11. digit = code for phase Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 4 5 6 7 8 9 3.

Check the fuse failure indicator(s) and. RIO-CI (digital channels 16-19) Channel mode All channels are OK 24 V to all digital channels is broken Fuse blown LED Dark Red Corrective actions None. Note that these indicators are only available for the DPUs listed in this section. Dark Fuse failure indicators Analogue and digital inputs are protected by internal circuit breakers. Separate channels Applicable for RIO-C2 (digital channels 9 to 16). Short-circuiting due to faulty sensors and/or damaged wires are indicated by the DPU. Isolate the fault by first pulling out one by one terminal block. unscrew wires for each sensor until the faulty sensor has been identified. replace the DPU. See the tables below for details. replace the DPU. Disconnect 10–20 sec. RIO-C4 (digital channels 9 to 12) Channel mode Inactive channel Fuse blown LED Dark Corrective actions None. After finding the relevant terminal block. replace the DPU. Check power supply and wiring. replace the DPU. Multiple channels Applicable for RDi-32 (digital channels 1 to 32). if applicable. Replace the sensor. If sensors with wiring are OK. Indication of fuse failure can either be for multiple channels simultaneously (typically displayed by a LED mounted in the vicinity of the power LED) or for separate channels (displayed by the LED also giving channel status). RIO-CI (analogue channels 12-15) Channel mode Inactive channel 24 V fuse is broken Fuse blown LED Dark Red Corrective actions None. perform corrective actions according to the tables below. If the sensor with wiring is OK. 1 2 Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given. 312401/B 413 . Separate channels Applicable for RAi-16 (analogue channels 1 to 16). If the power supply and wiring is OK. If the Power indicator is still red.Maintenance Power mode Power with wrong polarity No power Power LED Red Corrective actions Correct the power polarity and check again.

Replace the sensor. Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. replace the DPU. Status indicators 1 2 Operational mode Normal operation Run LED Green Locate the DPU for which the communication error is given. If the sensor with wiring is OK. Use the Rio load program to install the appropriate software. If the Watch Dog indicator is still lit replace the DPU. if applicable.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 Separate channels Applicable for RIO-C2 (digital channels 9 to 16). Check each status LED indicator and. This indicates that the Distributed Processing Unit has boot software installed. LED Green Corrective actions The unit seems to be working OK. Unscrew the sensor connected to the reported channel. No application loaded Dark Red Dark Green Not initialised Application stopped Dark Dark Red Red Dark Dark Dark Green 414 312401/B . perform corrective actions according to the table below. LED Flashing yellow End Init. but no basic software. Restart the unit by turning power off and then on again. Return the item to Kongsberg Maritime. If the Operator Station is still reporting an error replace the DPU. RIO-C4 (digital channels 9 to 12) Channel mode Active channel 24 V is broken Fuse blown LED Green Red Corrective actions None. Watch Dog LED Dark Info. Check the cabling.

200. 152. 114 screen saver. 116–117. 388 B Bar graphs. 218 how to set day. 180 how to make list of selected tags. 245 Access control. 218 how to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer. 27 display pages. 255 operational procedures. 148 how to toggle between group and alarm display. 115 Operational procedures. 190 how to save screen dump. 27 indication. 183 how to display counters and reset counters. 115 how to lock and unlock the TCP. 215 how to change list of tags in Selected Points group. 148. 184 how to display alarm history. 159. 182 how to access the Watch Calling Configuration. 137 where to find the Event Log display. 208 how to configure Event Log. dusk or night viewing conditions. 196 how to override limitations to acknowledge alarms. ShipViewer. 122. 124 Short trend display using CRP. 116 how to call officers. 390 Alarm and inhibit delays. 185 how to display system information. 210 how to override limitations to control pumps and valves. 210 how to print Miscellaneous Logs. 279 How to change access level. 98 panel layout.Index A About password access MOS. 279 How to call for backup. 78 Access control system CRP. 263 Bearing Wear Monitoring. 222 how to display alarm group information. 126 how to define the engineer qualifications. 35 Bearing Wear monitoring mimic ME monitoring. 121. 138. 410 Boiler control. 97 buzzer. 242 operational procedures. 44 Bridge watch alarms. 180 where to find Event Log display. 210 Long trend display using CRP. 28 inhibit. 201 Alarm & Control Panel (ALC) description. 200 Alarm detection. 209 how to change tag parameters for a channel. 195 how to configure the Noonlog. 264 BIST. 201 Hhow to define the engineer qualifications. 211 how to silence the CRP buzzer. 402 Alarm and monitoring display. 98 buttons and lamps. 55 Alarm and event limits. 219 how to change Deviation parameters. 221 Hhw to display system information. 162 Short trend display using TCP. 221 how to handle alarm events. 146. 121. 77 Alarm and Monitoring System Access control system. 160. 224 system functions. 197 how to change system time. 199 how to configure the Event Log. 132 how to configure the Autolog. 186 how to set the On Duty engineer. 29 groups. 30 using the CRP. 99 Analogue input tag items. 402 Alarms. 186 Info field. 157. 125. Watch calling system. 159 how to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers. 147. 27 Alarm sub-menu items. 184 how to display offscan alarms. 34 Bearing Wear ME monitoring. 218 how to acknowledge alarms. 188 screen Saver. 211 how to change time zone. 176 Long trend display using TCP. 40 Bridge Watch Monitoring System How to adjust system timers. 135. 156. 190 how to customize favourites. 120. 145. 115 using the TCP. 147. 122. 137 how alarms are printed after a black-out. 28 types. 155. 199 how to customise the Favourites. 134. 189 how to select the Watch Responsible location. MOS. 238 Navigator image. 147. 207. 77 Basic tag types. 27 ALC background light. 386 Bearing Monitoring. 133. 281 312401/B 415 . 145. 136. 155. 119. 97 temperature sensor. 252 overview. 127. 138 TCP. 389 Analogue output tags.

280 How to turn system Auto-mode on/off. 253 How to access the Watch Calling Configuration CRP. 75 Dynamic alarm limits ME monitoring. 400 Exhaust mean value parameters. 251 How to change between day and night viewing BWMS. 396 Display layout. 70 Generator Protection (RIO-C3) description. 390 Fuel performance system. 25 Common sub-menu items.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to change between day and night viewing. 37 Distributed Processing Units main characteristics. 281 How to change alarm delay MOS. 182 How to accept watch responsibility Watch calling system. 95 Gradient parameters. 403 local control. 152 TCP. 91 Using the INP. 397 Exhaust mean value tag items. 410 C Centralized operation. 79 F Filter time. 276 overview. 276 system functions. 278 How to turn the system on/off. 94 display layout. 391 Generator Monitoring and Control (RIO-C4) description. 155 TCP. 116–117 TCP. 266 Dynamic dead band. 90 Using the ALC. 279 How to call for backup BWMS. RDi-32a). 394 Counter input parameters. 401 Compressor control. 31 CRP buttons and lamps. 272 Cylinder Liner Temperature. 215 How to change list of tags in Selected Points group CRP. 157 TCP. 105 panel layout. 277 Normal use. 403 parameters. 69 Getting started. 34 Engine overview mimic ME monitoring. 22 Diagnostics. 393 Counters. 100 using the MOS. 24 Enable alarms and events. 66 Remote Digital Input (RDi-32. 50 Design principles. 263 Engineer’s safety functions. 257 D Decentralized system architecture. 71 Process Segment Starcoupler (PSS). 46 416 312401/B . 43 Control Room Panel (CRP) description. 65 Remote Digital Output (RDo-16). 78 Digital input parameters. 278 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration. 271 Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic ME monitoring. 396 Digital input tag items. 252 How to change access level BWMS. 390 Engine exhaust gas temperature monitoring. 94 Cylinder Liner ME monitoring. 91 buzzer. 401 Common sub-menu parameters. 276 Operational procedures. 280 How to select backup navigator on duty. 103 Using the TCP. 91 temperature sensor. 23 Descriptions units. 403 Exhaust deviation parameters. 30 Engine monitoring. 78 How alarms are printed after a black-out CRP. 279 How to call officers CRP. 280 How to change Deviation parameters CRP. 134 E Earthing. 63 DPU Digital Governor Unit (DGU). 218 How to acknowledge alarms CRP. 409 Counter input measured values. 30 G Gateways. 22 Built In Self-Test (BIST). 66 Dual Process Segment Controller (dPSC) description. 251 How to change alarm limits MOS. 390 H Hard copy. 74 Generator control. 72 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-10tc). 40 Building blocks. 393 Counter input tag items. 397 Explanation of displays ShipViewer. 64 Remote Analogue Output (RAo-8). 403 OS control. 53 Corrective maintenance. 400 Exhaust deviation tag items. 219 How to call the ON DUTY engineer Watch calling system. 116 How to adjust system timers BWMS. 97 using the CRP. 94 trackball.

211 How to silence the CRP buzzer CRP. 185 How to display system information CRP. 266 312401/B 417 . 184 How to display information about DPUs MOS. 137. 197 How to change system time CRP. 222 How to display alarm group information CRP. 147 TCP. 283 How to operate valves MOS. 278 How to turn the system on/off BWMS. 260 How to print Miscellaneous Logs CRP. 299 How to operate a fan starter MOS. 207. 317 How to display offscan alarms CRP. 135 TCP. 121 TCP. 148 How to toggle between group and alarm display CRP. 243 TCP. 145. 136 TCP. 313 How to operate a pump starter MOS. dusk or night viewing conditions CRP. 195 How to configure the Noonlog CRP. 120 MOS. 330 OS. 126 How to define the engineer qualifications CRP. 277 How to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters ME monitoring. 327 OS. 209 How to change tag parameters MOS. 122 TCP. 180 How to make list of selected tags CRP. 278 How to select the Watch Responsible location CRP. 159 TCP. 340 How to override limitations to acknowledge alarms CRP. 190 How to receive a call Watch calling system. 280 How to set the On Duty engineer CRP. 127 TCP. 145 TCP. 196 How to open or close valves OS. 186 How to transfer watch responsibility Watch calling system. 133 TCP. 132 How to configure the Autolog CRP. 246 How to display mimic pictures MOS. 156 TCP. 122 TCP. 243 How to display counters and reset counters CRP. 295 How to operate a PID controller MOS. 309 How to operate a compressor MOS. 147 TCP. 155 TCP. 146 TCP. 199 How to configure the Event Log TCP. 190 How to customize favourites CRP. 183 How to display alarm information when in off duty mode Watch calling system. 218 How to set day. 160 TCP. 252 How to respond to alarms Watch calling system. 242 TCP. 119 MOS. 247 How to change tag parameters for a channel CRP. 221 How to handle alarm events CRP. 211 How to change time zone CRP. 210 How to print displayed information ShipViewer. 344 OS. 125 TCP. 189 How to save ShipViewer images. 218 How to silence the Control Room Panel buzzer TCP. 221 How to define Watch Calling panel groups for on duty engineers CRP. 200. 148 TCP.Index TCP. 208 How to configure Event Log CRP. 210 How to override limitations to control pumps and valves CRP. 159 TCP. 253 How to display alarm summary MOS. 115 MOS. 184 How to display alarm history CRP. 261 How to select backup navigator on duty BWMS. 186 How to set the keyboard and screen configuration BWMS. 242 How to lock and unlock the TCP. 252 How to turn system Auto-mode on/off BWMS. 252 How to save screen dump CRP. 199 How to customise the Favourites TCP. 121 TCP. 317 OS.

406 ME monitoring Bearing Wear. 102 trackball. OS. 243 how to display information about DPUs. 407 Maintenance Plan. 269 operational procedures. 366 Operational procedures. 366 PMS. 379 operate generator set without start/stop control. 272 Dynamic alarm limits. OS. 51 Operator Stations descriptions. 51 getting started. 247 how to display alarm group information. 54 Introduction. 242 AMS. Watch calling system. 90 Overview mimic ME monitoring. 405 BIST. 270 System overview mimic. 402 INP background light. OS. 101 Input Panel (INP) description. 367 operational procedures. 276 O Operational procedures AMS. MOS. MOS. 251 how to change tag parameters. 255 Maintenance. 391 MetaPower torque monitoring. 263 overview mimic. 382 operate generator set with start/stop control. 265 Measured values. 271 Cylinder Liner monitoring mimic . 86 Navigator image CRP. 43 Power Management System operate bus-tie breaker. 263 P PDF viewer. 268 Short Trend Alarm Logging. 83 MOS about password access. 37 Main functions ShipViewer. with adjustable set-point. 51 getting started. 348 Operator functions. 80 Logging. 370 operate generator set without start/stop control. 263 how to use Bearing Wear monitoring parameters. 100 panel layout. 176 Long trend display using TCP.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 How to use fluctuate monitoring parameters ME monitoring. MOS. 347 418 312401/B . 115 Normal use of the BWMS. ShipViewer. 261 I Image types. 103 menus. 245 how to change alarm delay. 15 K Keyboard and screen configuration MOS. 408 weekly. 77 Operator maintenance. 316 PCS. 242 keyboard and screen configuration. 102 buttons and lamps. 273 How to view saved mimic diagram files ShipViewer. 406 schedule. 243 how to display alarm history. 409 preventive. 106 Multiple Serial Interface (MSI 12) description. 78 Long trend display using CRP. 266 how to use fluctuate monitoring parameters . 255 AMS. 263 Sensor System Failure. 244 L List image. 52 Monitoring image. 406 Preventive 6–monthly. 147 TCP. 348 overview. 242 how to display alarm summary. 264 Cylinder Liner. 283 PMS. 85 PID controllers. 273 Long Trend Logging. 406 yearly. 244 keyboard layout. 412 Status. MOS. 251 how to change alarm limits. 252 BWMS. 79 Indicators Fuse failure. 100 temperature sensor. 276 PCS. 238 Long Trend Logging ME monitoring. 405 Operator Panels descriptions. 210 Inhibit parameters. 410 corrective. 39 Midi Operator Station description. 269 M Main Bearing temperature. 381 operate main switchboard controller . 246 how to handle alarm events. 414 Info field CRP. 263 Bearing Wear monitoring mimic. 71 N Navigator. 266 Engine overview mimic. 413 Power. 90 Operator Station description. ME monitoring.

84 System description architecture. 86 PDF viewer. 411 U Understanding the ShipViewer display. 41 Process image. 299. 162 Short trend display using TCP. 82 Trend monitoring. 74 operation. 79 image layout. 58 System diagrams. 270 Short trend display using CRP. 295. 80 Process mimics. 389 engineer’s safety. 47 Ship Viewer. 96 panel layout. 344 How to operate a pump starter. 84 trend image. 91 Using the Input Panel (INP). 64 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C1) description. 110 Watch Cabin Unit (WCU) description. 340 Operational procedures. 19 System overview. 22 design principles. 95 Graphic Display Navigator. 78 Sensor System Failure ME monitoring. MOS. 20 System Gateway (SGW). 69 RIO-C3 7–segment display troubleshooting. 67 Remote Input/Output (RIO-C2) description. 283. 410 RIO-C3. 50 User interface. this manual. 330 How to operate a fan starter. 15 R Reference guide. 268 Sentry. 391 Screen saver TCP. 388 Remote Analogue Input (RAi-16) description. 283 overview. 283 system functions. 412 DPU error codes. 18 System overview mimic ME monitoring. 23 building blocks. 22 DPUs. 255 Unit descriptions. 107 Watch Bridge Unit (WBU) description. 25 system overview. 32 TCP Alarm Navigator. 38 Self-checking. 41 Status displays. 56 Trend image. 257 how to print displayed information. 260 how to save ShipViewer images. 80 monitoring image. 43 Purpose. 85 process image. 42 Voltage Converter Controller (VCC) description. 366 Preventive maintenance. 100 Using the Midi Operator Station (MOS). 74 System images display and control. OS. 77 Purifier control. 18 Watch Calling. 73 W Watch Bridge Unit using the WBU. 95 Touch Control Panel (TCP) description. 261 main functions . 103 Using the Touch Control Panel (TCP). 313. 317 How to operate valves. 83 Navigator. 327 How to operate a PID controller. 30 Troubleshooting DPU communication errors. 23 System components. 60 Watch calling system 312401/B 419 . 63 gateways. 17 Running hours. 265 T Tank display. 411 Rules safety. 77 Using the Alarm & Control Panel (ALC). 31 S Safety general rules. 261 how to view saved mimic diagram files. 124 Scuffing. 77 System architecture. 59 Watch Cabin Unit using the WCU. 68 RIO. 385 alarm and monitoring parameters. 188 Screen Saver CRP. 406 Process Control System How to display mimic pictures. 316 Operational procedures. 224 Stand-by pumps.Index system functions. 309 How to operate a compressor. 97 Using the Control Room Panel (CRP). 403 tag types. 80 Ship Viewer. 317 How to open or close valves. 36 Shaft generator. 255 understanding the ShipViewer display. 95 V Valve control. 89 ShipViewer Explanation of displays. 45 user inter face. 17 Scaling parameters. 255 Short Trend Alarm Logging ME monitoring. 89 system configuration image. 79 list image. 87 display layout. 82 System interfaces. 386 Relays. 22 System configuration image.

110 WCU adjust illumination. 113 panel layout. 252 how to transfer watch responsibility. 111 panel layout. LCD. 109 test panel. 58 Water in oil detection. 36 420 312401/B . 112 respond to alarms. 108 panel layout. 112 test panel. 137 Where to find the Event Log display TCP. 252 Watch Calling system. 252 how to respond to alarms. LED. 38 WBU adjust illumination. 113 Weekly maintenance.Kongsberg K-Chief 500 how to accept watch responsibility. 200 Wireless temperature monitoring. LED. 253 how to receive a call. 406 Where to find Event Log display CRP. 109 panel layout. 252 how to display alarm information when in off duty mode. LCD. 253 how to call the ON DUTY engineer.

Index 312401/B 421 .

com . Norway Telephone: +47 33 03 20 00 Telefax: +47 85 02 80 28 www.O.kongsberg.Box 1009 N-3194 Horten.©2008 Kongsberg Maritime Kongsberg Maritime AS Bekkajordet P.